TW214588B - - Google Patents

Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW214588B
TW214588B TW81104859A TW81104859A TW214588B TW 214588 B TW214588 B TW 214588B TW 81104859 A TW81104859 A TW 81104859A TW 81104859 A TW81104859 A TW 81104859A TW 214588 B TW214588 B TW 214588B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
register
address
ram
data
pixel
Prior art date
Application number
TW81104859A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Original Assignee
An Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by An Inc filed Critical An Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW214588B publication Critical patent/TW214588B/zh

Links

Description

214588 Λ 6 IJ6 經濟部中央#準局A工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明(3 ) 本發明係有鼷一個資訊處理裝置,其中包括一儸唯一 之外部記憶體單元,該單元具有一値可程式處理器。尤其 是蘭於一個可移動之外部記億體單元,其具有一锢程式記 億體,以儲存將於一傾主處理条統上執行的程式。主處理 条統例如電視遊樂条統。部份設計像利用一個可程式撤處 理器,以增進主条統的高速繪讓處理能力。可程式處理器 ,包括硬體侔使用於從一傾圖素基格式轉換成為字元基格 式。 本申誚案像與已申請案號-,_相_,其名稱 > 使用於 一個霣視遊樂器条統之具有可程式獪圖處理器的外部記憶 醱条統〃(代理编號.1248-2)。並與申讅案號相關其 名稱v使用於一傾電視遊樂器条統之具有增強記億體控制 電路的繪圖處理器〃(代理编號.1248-5)。 習知技蕕之電視遊樂器,具有一個8位元撤處理器, 和一個相關於顯示處理的次条統,均實施於一個電視遊樂 器控制板上。典型之方式傷利用在卡匣上以8位元對8位 元矩陣預先儲存字元,並且利用這預先儲存宇元的各種不 同可程式組合,以建立一個銀幕畫面顯示,因而産生繪圖 。此種習知技術電梘遊樂器条統,具有移動整個顯示背景 ,和多値受遊樂者控制之移動目標的能力。 此種習知技術条統,對於由多邊形組成的移動目標必 須對每傾圖框操作,例如從轉和再繪等,均無能力實際地 實施這種電視遊樂功能。習知技術8位元處理器,與此条 統相關顯示處理之霄路,俱不能夠執行例如有效地轉三度 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#填窍本頁) 裝- 線- 本紙張尺度遑用中a B家標準(CNS) Ή規格(210x297公*) 3 81. 6. 10,000張(Η) 214588 Λ 6 η 6 五、發明説明(4 ) 空間多邊形基目標,或者適當地比例於此種旋轉目標,以 産生3-D型特殊效應。本發明則認知,精密繪圖需以一悃 像素-對-像素為基礎的銀幕晝面更新,並且在一偁以即時 為基礎而執行複雜數學。此種習知技術以字元為基礎之電 視遊樂器,不能夠執行此種工作。 習知技術8-位元電視遊樂器亦不能有效地執行其它治 圖技術,此技術需以一個像素-對-像素為基礎,能快速地 更新畫面。例如,此条統不能有效地映至一個目標到一個 顯示多邊形,該多邊形係為另一顯示目標(此後稱為w紋 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#塡寫本頁) 經濟部中央櫺準局貝工消费合作社印製 用處之更允基景 D 精,圖 完畫 使元需與,元背3-示如偁 έ 種需 為位所生統宇色。有顯例 l6f此必 ,16形産糸為彩面具應。接*1施 , 力此圖之的成多前許效變框一7C實器 。努。密色基製速或允此改圖¥效樂 份的統精彩元繪高面不。痛値 有遊 部面条更密字先在背,施必一W欲的 一 方器行精為預可的器實框在 ί ,標 之力樂執更器被亦面樂的圖霈JH:知目 中能遊可許樂能,平遊際個必 認基 間團視,允遊,统此視實每 ,jg人形 空繪電統,視施条於電器在器 明邊 度在計条如電實器置元樂其樂J',發多 三器設器例元的樂標位遊,遊 W 。之 於機器樂,位能遊目16視成的 的小 Μ 元理遊統16功視動術電做標/.際縮 / 位處視条此樂電移技進形目和實大 Η0Ο 元電此。遊元及知先邊轉大不放 ¥ 知位之。度視位,習的多旋放是寸 re習16供構析電16動此應用全上現尺 tu進之提機解的此移是效利完礎實和 ex改力所的圔泛。之但別標多基上轉 U 有器學繪廣圖面 特目許之器旋 理 更理數佳許的平 型密需框機全 裝· 訂- 線- 本紙張尺度边用中a «家楳毕(CNS) T4規格(210X297公龙) 4 81.6. ΙΟ,ΟΟΟίΚΙΙ) 214588 Λ 6 |{ 6 經濟部中央樑準局KX工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明(5 ) 多邊形的邊緣,並且«入此多邊形基目標於一侮像素-對 -像素·基上適當賫料。此種工作,像在一傾像素-對-像素 基上執行,而消耗很多的處理時間。 於習知技術中,修改可移動遊樂器卡匣以改進遊樂器 精巧性,係利用允許現存處理器定址一個較大程式記億體 位址空間,此位址空間大於主微處理器所允許的柑關位址 線的數目。例如,此習知技術8位元条統使用包含多記憶 體控制器晶Η的遊樂器卡匣,以晶Η執行記慊體分組( bank)交換和其他增加功能。但此記億體分組交換相關晶 片,不能夠能電視遊樂条統執行高速圖形處理。 本發明解決習知技術之上述問題,利用提供一摑唯一 •全部可程式之蝓圖處理器,其像被設計於一個可移動外 部記億體單元内,和一傾主資訊處理条統相連接。於此說 明實施例中,本發明所實施的一鏟電視遊樂器条統,包含 一健主電視遊樂器条統,與一個電視遊樂器卡匣,其内含 此繪圏微處理器。 該繪圔橄處理器與電視樂器条統,包含許多獨特和優 點的待點,以下是某些概要。 根據本發明,一個》特的繪圖撤處理器可插入連接到 一値主撇霄腦。欲«得最大處理速度,縉圖處理器也可以 平行於主撖電腦操作。於一實施例中,鑰圖處理器所在的 遊樂器卡匣,亦包括一個儘謓記億體(ROM)和一個隨機存 取記億體(R A Μ )。 本發明的繪圖共處理器,伸裁它自己需求和從主撇電 (請先間讀背而之注意事項#蜞寫本頁) 本紙張尺度遑用中a國家標準(CNS) 規格(210x297公龙) 81. 6. 10,000¾ (11) °!45δ8 Λ 6 IJ6 經濟部屮央櫺準局员工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明(6) 腦資料抓取間之記憶膿變動(transaction)。該處理器能 同時和主撤腦執行程式,以允許高速處理,在此之前之習 知遊樂器糸統無法逹到。 本發明的繪_共處理器,像與遊樂器卡匣上所實施的 一個三匯流排結構連接操作,其允許RAM和ROM卡匣記億體 之有效使用,利用最佳之主處理器卡匣處理器二者的能力, 以有效地使用此記億體裝置。 本發明之完全使用者可程式繪圍共處理器,包括一健 唯一指令集俥允許高速處理。該指令集能有效地實施相關 於3-D繪圖算術蓮算以及,例如,包括特殊指令利用專用 硬醱之執行,使用於主電視遊樂器条統的字元映至顯示上 畫出個別像素。 指令集包括唯一像素基指令,從程式者觀點,像利用 允許傾財"像素的定址創造一傾、'虛〃位元映至甚至若主 条統為字元基者。像素資料嬙圖處理器轉換宇元資料,此 格式典型地被主字元基16位元機器所使用。因此,例如, 雖然程式者使用一個獨特w PLOT 〃指令以晝一饍像素,當 相两資料讀到RAM,資料轉換成為一摑字元基格式,而使 得16位元主機能夠使用。 特別用途像素耋圖硬體執行此指令,以有效地允許實 施高速3-D型鑰臛。耋面硬體協肋即時地轉換從像素座標 定址成為字元映至定址,此定址主条統可自然地使用。其 優黏為,處理器利用指定X和Y座樣寫程式,此座標定義 在顯示耋面上毎個像素的位置。 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) 裝. 線· 本紙張尺度逍用中as家楳iMCNS)T4規格(210X297公釐) 6 81.6. 10,000ft (11) 214588 Λ 6 η 6 五、發明説明(7 ) 因此,執行嬙圖操作基於一傾程式者所指定像素、及 經濟部屮央榣準局员工消赀合作杜印製 。 程像標動 明 方 實 構括 之 操 料顯 可定座驅 發 之 佳 結包 器 器 C 資 W 許待Υ於 本 統 最 械中 理 理 圖。 元地 允個和用 - 条 之 機其 處 處 塊圈 宇的 以一 X 使 式 體 前 例, 共 共 方塊 式望 ,於,式 圏 億 目 範元 圖 團 細方 格HSS令用此方 其 記 , 之單 繪 繪 詳細 地RA指使因此 及 部 圖 匣座 之 始 更詳 當像 鼸並,, 明 外 塊。卡基 例 起 之更 適影 相,素址 說 値 方者器個 施 作 元之 為的 圖樣像位 細。一 之器樂一 實 操 單路 成器 畫座鼸的 詳解之 統理遊與 佳 行 輯電 、理 同 Υ 相義 之了例 糸處個器 最 執 邐圏 格處 不和畫定 例易施 理共一理 之 統 與畫 規主 種 X 與元 施容實 處圓示處 前 条 術素 像在 各之彩字 實更明 主繪顯共 目 理 算像 換至 於上色個Μ0明將發 之傾,圏 據 處 示示 轉映 應面定 1RA發性本 例一匾繪 根 主。所0 地料 镳畫決於像本特據 施有視個 係 用圖 44Α 速資 體示先開影列它根 實具透一 。0 利程團圈 快元 硬顯預相的下其係 僳用係有統與 係流傲僳 «宇 。圖 在個為 器由與 1 2 使 3 含条 4 。5序<07 硬,來耋擇一成理經酤圖。圖偽 Η 内理圖Η圖順圖圄 圖後出 遘之換處 優 圏 例 其處 塊 之 耋然示 式素轉主 之 塊 施 ,主 方 作 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙蜞寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逍用中a國家標毕(CNS)f 4規格(2丨0X297公;it) 7 81.6. !0,000*〇[) 214538 Λ 6 η 6 經濟部屮央標準局兵工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明(8) 匾8Α係一方塊園,顯示利用畫_控制器所接收的输入 倍號,及利用畫圜控制器産生的输出信號。 圖8Β傑像素畫函電路於彩色矩陣内的一個彩色矩陣元 素。 圖8C像相關於像素畫國電路之時序,控制與資料信號 〇 匾9像圔4Α所示RAM控制器之更詳細方塊圖。 _ 9 A像匾9所示相鼷於RAM控制器之時序,控制與資 料信號。 圖10係圏9所示説明仲裁通輯的一健電路圖。 函11像本發明的繪圏共處理器實施例之再同步電路圖 〇 匾12係相醑於圖11的再同步電路之時序信號説明。 園13僳本發明繪画共處理器的RAM控制器之更詳細方 塊圜。 圖14係根據本發明實施例之繪園共處理器的快速控制 器之方塊圈。 圈15A僳一方塊圖,顯示本發明繪圖共處理器的指令 解碼相關電路。 圖15B像時序信號,證明在圏15A中向前看邏輯之操作 〇 圔16與17偽方塊,顯示根據本發明實施例之繪圖共 處理器的暫存器控制邏輯。 圖18係實施例一傾多邊形産生工作之繪圖共處理器的 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#塡寫本頁) 本紙尺度逋用中B Η家楳準(CNS) T4規格(210X297公;«:) 81. 6. 10,000張(Η) 經濟部中央標準局兵工消费合作社印製 214538 五、發明説明(9 ) - 操作範例流程圏之順序。 圖19、20及21你産生多邊形基目揉的範例顯示,以說 明根據本發明實施例之尺寸的比例與旋轉特色。 太發明;> 麝住窨躲锎夕註紬說明如下: 根據本實施例,本發明繪圃共處理器相互作用於一悔 16任元霄視遊樂器条統。此条统像為美國的任天堂公司所 發售的超级任天堂娛樂条統(超级NES)。此超级任天堂娛 樂条統於美國申請案號07/651,265,名稱w影像處理裝置 〃中部份說明,其申讅日期1991年4月10日。以及1991年 8月26日申請,申請案號07/749,530,其名稱a直接記億 醱存取装置與外部儲存裝置"。此等申誚案於此當成參考 。鏖了解,本發明未限於超级HES之相蘭應用,並且可許 用於其它霣視遊樂器条統或其它非電視遊樂器及資訊處理 裝置。 為容易參考之目的,根據本發明實施例的繪圖處理器 ,以後稱為"瑪荆歐晶片(Mario chip)"。目前最佳實施 例所說明的瑪琍歐晶片,係被包裝在一個電視遊樂卡匣。 應了解,本發明中之瑪琍歐晶片不一定要和程式記億體在 相同卡匣内,只要在使用時連接到一摘程式記憶體與主處 理單元。 圖1係根據本發明最佳實施例中.一儲範例轚視遊樂 器卡匣/外部記億《条統。該遊樂器卡匣包括一龆印刷電 路板(未顯示),在此板上所有圈1〆組件均安裝在上面。卡 匣包括一列連接器霣極1,係安置在印刷電路板的嵌入端. 本紙5*:尺度逍用中a明家榣準(CNS)T4規格(210x297公址) 81.6. 10,000¾ (II) (請先間讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) 裝. 線- 214588 Λ 6 15 6 經濟部中央櫺準局员工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明表〇 ) 使用於傅輪信號到以及從超级nes主控制板。該列連接器 霉極1偽利用一個配合連接器所收容,安置在超级NES主 控制板。 根據本發明實施例,在遊樂器卡匣上所具有瑪琍歐晶 片(繪圖共遘理器)2,像一嫡100到128支脚的積醱霣路晶 片。瑪琍歐晶Η接收從主處理糸統(例如超级NES)的許多 控制,位址和資料信號。例如,瑪琍歐晶片2,接收從主 處理条統經脚Ρ112的一個21ΜΗΖ時鐘信號輸入,和經脚 PU7—傾21ΜΗΖ的条統時艟信號輸入(或另一個預先決定頻 率)。遠条統時鐘信號輸入使於,例如,提供瑪琍歃處理 器,使用於主CPU記憶醱存取之記億體時序資訊,和提供 時鐘信號在瑪琍歃晶片内的時序操作。,瑪琍歐晶片2亦 包括一傾可選擇之外部時鐘信號輸入時鐮(脚11〇),網合 瑪琍歐晶片到一個外部石英4,以驅動瑪琍歐CPU,例如, 在一傾較高於從主条统所接收21MHZ之頻率時鐘信號。 主CPU位址輸人(HA)從主處理(例如,超级NES CPU /圖 處理單元PPU)位址匯流排經脚P37到脚P62連接到瑪琍歃晶 Η 2。類似地,從主条統資料輸入(Ηβ)從主CPU資料匯流排 V 經脚P65-P72縝合到瑪琍歐晶片2。此外,瑪琍歃晶片2經 P119,經脚P118的一値重置信號,和經脚Pl〇4, P105的讀 和寫控制信號接收從主CPU的一鏑記億醱更新信號RFSH。 瑪琍歃晶片産生一値中斷要求信號IRQ,並且铒合這信號1 經脚P120到超级NES。從超級NES所接收其它控制信號,例 如經脚106的一傾ROMS E£信號,例如使用於起始一個主程 i~y (請先閱讀背而之注意事項孙填寫木頁) 本紙張尺度逍用中國Η家標毕(CNS) T4規格(210x297公:«:) 10 81. 6. 10,000張(II) 214588 五、發明説明1(1 ) 式R0M10所存取。此外,卡匣亦包括一值確認處理器3,在 输入I,輸出0,和重置R線上與一個超级NES確認處理器 交襄資料。使用於確認遊樂器卡匣之確認處理器3與安全 糸統,也可參考美國專利案號4,799,635。 瑪爾歐晶片親合到KAM6和8傜經RAH位址匯流排( RAM A),與RAM位址脚P74-P91,與RAM資料匯流排(RAM D) 和資料脚P93- 1 00。逭些RAM可為動態記憶醱裝置,其控制 部份使用行位址和列位址選通脈衝信號(R AS, CAS),經脚 P90和P91相連接。利用一或多镛靜態RAM代替動態RAM,並 且且脚P90和P91使用於連接位址信號到其籲別的RAM,而 不需使用行位址和列址遘通脈衝信號。一傾寫致能控制信 號VE,經脚107適當地網合到RAM6到8。 經濟部屮央櫺準局貝工消费合作社印製 (請先閱讀背而之注意事項典增寫木頁) 利用主CPU産生讀和寫控制信號(R,W),並且經脚1〇4 和105連接到瑪琍歐晶Η。利用監看該等讀和寫信號線, 瑪琍歐晶片能決定此超级NES CPU企圖執行之記億體存取 操作的本質。類似地,從主条統幾乎所有位址和控制&, 利用瑪琍歐晶片監督,以追踪該主CPU企_做的軌跡。瑪 琍歒晶片所接收之ROM和RAM位址信號,被監督和通過到適 當的記億體裝置。在這方面,ROM位址經ROM位址匯流揉和 脚P2及P26,網合到程式R0M10,並且RAM位址經脚P74到脚 P91鍋合到RAM6和9。從主CPU之ROM和RAM資料输人,經 ROM資料匯流排和脚P28-P35,並經脚P93到P100適當地鍋 合到R0H10,瑪琍»晶片可使用於逋接到一籲廣範園的不 同記值髏裝置,除了上述的ROM和RAM之外。例如,正計劃 本紙張尺度遑用中a B家橒毕(CNS) TM規格(2丨0x297公龙) 11 81. 6. 10,000¾ (H) 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 經濟部中央櫺準局CX工消伢合作杜印製 五、發明説明(1 2) 使瑪琍晶Μ使用於只有CD ROM的電視遊樂器糸統。 例如,圖1中,一鏟CD ROM(未顯示)代替R0M10,使 用於儲存字元資料,程式指令,影像,圖面,和聲音資料 。一個傳統型CD黷頭(亦未顯示)適合於連接瑪琍歐晶片2, 從位址匯流排P2-P26接收記億醱位址,使用於從資料匯流 排P28-P35上存取資料和/或指令。CD讀取與CDR0M儲存統 之細操作與特定指令,對該行業專業人士所習知。利用 CD ROM儲存的優點,係大幅減低每位元組資料儲存的成本 。該資料儲存成本,也許比在半導體ROM儲存成本少成 100至1 000百分比。然而不幸地,CD ROM記億醱存取/讀出 時間,甚至於慢於半導體R 〇 Μ。 瑪琍歃晶Η使用三匯流排結構,允許資料至少平行地 使用三傾匯流排。在此方面,如圔1所示遊樂器卡匣,瑪 琍歐晶片2讲合到一傭ROM匯流排(包括ROM資料線、ROM位 址線和控制線),一艟RAM匯流排(包括RAM位址線、資料線 、和控制線)以及一傾主處理器匯流排(包括主位址、資料 和控制線)。 瑪琍歐晶片結構,允許平行管道式(Pip ^ined)操作發 生,以獲得最佳之输出容量。在此方面,瑪琍歐晶片從 ROM中讀出一値資料位元組,當處理其它資料時,仍進一 步寫資料到RAM,以允許有效地執行3-D相鼷繪圖。如下進 一步說明,瑪琍默晶片2CD部使用一個16位元結構,並仍 設計成界面於8位元R0M10和RAM6、8晶H。所有内部資料 匯流排的内部暫存器均為16位元,從R0M10讀出,並且寫 12 本紙5JL尺度逍用中國國家楳準(CNS)T4規格(210X297公龙) 81. 6. 10,000張(II) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項洱填寫本頁) A 6 η 6 經濟部中央標準局κχ工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明(13) 入RAM6、8、、緩衝",並且典型地不使程式執行速度慢下來。/ 類似地,瑪琍歐晶M2也可從CD ROM中,存取指令和 嫌圏資料。並且寫該資訊進入RAM6、8中,使用於後鑲 D Μ A傅送進入主處理器的影像R A Μ ,例如超级N E S圖形處理 單元(PPU)。該行業專業人士將予欣賞者,像瑪琍歐晶片 2可程式資料的座標轉換,從CD ROM直接到PPU的影像 RAM。省略通過RAM儲存和存取操作。 瑪琍歐晶片2的極端快速處理速度,使得CD ROM儲存 能實際地使用於縉圈應用,雖然CD ROM需長讀存取時間。 影像及聲音在儲存CD ROM之前,利用傅統資料壓缩技術壓 縮。資料壓縮與後原技術對該行業人士是為習知。在從 CD ROM存取壓縮資料後,瑪荆歃晶H2使用傳統資料復原 演算法復原資料,其所使用時間俱很短於利用傳統繪圖處 理器所能完成者。因為它用一鏑21MHZ時鐘信號操作,瑪 琍歐晶片2完成復原,在預定時間週期内使資料傳送到 RAM6、8 〇 因此,典型CD ROM之存取遇期,能大董存取影像和聲 音資料(壓缩形式)。但是,此相對長存取時間的效應縮小 因為在利用瑪琍歃晶片2資料復原後,毎傾資料位元組的 實際存取時間大幅減少。利用瑪琍歃晶片2執行復原時, 主繪圖處器,例如超级HES PPU,則可以執行其它處理工 作。當然,假如速度對一個待別應用不需考«,則瑪荆歐 晶Η 2能從CD ROM中存取未壓縮形式的資料。 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙塡寫木頁) 豕紙張尺度逍用中a S家標準(CNS) 規格(210X297公;«:) 13 81. 6. 10,000¾ (II) 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 經濟部中央櫺準局CX工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明d 4) 當使用靜態RAM,卡匣亦可包括一値備用電池。一鏔 備用霣池12經一傾電阻R,網合到一籲傳統備用電池罨路 14,提供靜態RAM和一個靜態RAM晶片選擇信號RAMCS的一 鵪備用霣蹏(RSRAM),假如電供應喪失時可提供一個賫料 儲存功能。 此外,網合到RAM位址匯流排,可選設定電阻16。在 正常操作時,瑪琍歐晶片位址線是输出到RAM6和8。但在 重置和開機操作期間,使用逭位址線當成输入線,而産生 一艏高或低信號像依是否其連接到一傾預先決定之霣壓VCC 或接地而定。由此方式,一掴^ 1 〃或"〇〃適當地讀進一 餡内部瑪琍歐晶Η暫存器。在重置後,依道些電阻的不同 設定,瑪琍歐晶Η能決定(在程式執行期間),例如,多工 器時鐘信號速率,到瑪琍歐晶片耩合的RAM存取時間,使 用於瑪琍歐其它操作之時鐘信號速率等。經由這些選擇設 定暫存器的設定,瑪琍歃晶片,例如,可使用於多種不同 型式記億醱裝置,而不需修改任何瑪琍歐晶片之設計。例 如,假如檢視測到一镝動態RAM設定,則再更新倍號於適 當次數。此外,選擇設定使用於控制速度,例如,處理器 多工器電路操作,並允許利用镥圏處理器執行其它指令, 其速率較快而可執行某些乘法指令。因此,利用起始一個 延遲乘法執行,其餘指令能在較快時鐘信號速率執行,( 例如,處理器也許設定在時鐘信號30MHZ,因此選擇設定 將有效地使乘法指令於15HHZ執行)。 圖2偽一個實施例之主電視遊樂器糸統的方塊圖•其 14 本紙張尺度逍用中B國家標準(CNS) T4規格(2丨0x297公釐) 81. 6. 10,000張(II) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項科埙寫木頁) Λ 6 1(6 214588 五、發明説明ί 5 ) (請先閱讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) 中範例遊樂器卡_如圈1所設計者。_2,例如,代表美 國的任天堂所售的超级NES。但月未1在如H2 # 示之超级NES相鼷之應用或条统。 超级NES包括它的控制板20内,一個16位元主CPU,例 如,其也許是一備65 8 1 6相容撤電腦。CPU22網合到一個1 作RAM32,例如,其或許包括128{(位元組的戧存。CPU22網 合到一鋦麵形處理單元(ΡΡϋ)24,依次鎘合到一餡影像 RAM30,其也許包括例如餘存的字組。在垂直或水平尽滅 '/ .- 脈衝間隔間内,CPU22經PPU24存取影像RAM30,除了在有 效線掃描期間内,當PPU24存取彩像RAM時。PPU24從影_ 像RAM30,産生一値影像顯示在使用者的罨視36上。CPU亦 網合到一掴轚音處理單元APU26,該單元錤合到一値工作 RAM28。APU也許包含商業用的聲音晶片,産生相闋於電視 遊樂器程式之聲音,此程式儲存在遊樂器卡匣之R0M10内 。CPU經APU26只能存取工作RAM28。PPU24和APU26經RF諝 變器單元34,縝合到使用者家用電視36。 經濟部屮央櫺準局β工消费合作社印製214588 Λ 6 IJ6 Central Ministry of Economics # quasi-bureau A industrial and consumer cooperatives printed 5. Description of the invention (3) The present invention is an information processing device, which includes a 㑩 only external memory unit, the unit has a Program processor. In particular, it is a portable external memory unit with a programming memory to store programs to be executed on the main processing system. Main processing rules such as TV entertainment rules. Some designs are like using a programmable removal processor to improve the main system's high-speed rendering processing capability. Programmable processors, including hardware, are used to convert from one-tiled pixel-based format to character-based format. The image of this application is the same as the application number-, _ 相 _, its name > used in an external memory system with a programmable processor for a long-term game system (Agent No. 1248 -2). And the name v related to the application number is used in the graphics processor with enhanced memory control circuit of Yiqian TV game system (Agent No. 1248-5). The conventional TV game instrument has an 8-bit processor and a sub-system related to display processing, which are implemented on a TV game control board. A typical way is to use 8-bit to 8-bit matrix pre-stored characters on the cassette, and use this pre-stored yuyuan's various programmable combinations to create a screen display, thus generating a drawing. This type of conventional technology, electric tour musical instrument system, has the ability to move the entire display background and multiple moving targets controlled by the player. This kind of conventional technical system must operate on every tilt frame for moving objects composed of polygons, such as turning and redrawing, etc., and are unable to actually implement this TV amusement function. Conventional technology 8-bit processor, related to this system of display processing, can not perform, for example, effectively turn three degrees (please read back to the precautions #fill this page) Install-line-this Paper scales are used in the National Standards (CNS) Ή specification (210x297 g *) 3 81. 6. 10,000 sheets (Η) 214588 Λ 6 η 6 V. Description of the invention (4) Space polygonal base target, or appropriate proportion For this kind of rotating target, to produce 3-D special effects. The present invention recognizes that precise drawing needs to be updated on a screen-by-pixel-by-pixel basis, and that complex mathematics is performed on a real-time basis. This type of conventional technology is based on character-based video games, and cannot perform such work. Conventional technology 8-bit TV game instruments cannot effectively perform other image processing techniques. This technique requires a pixel-by-pixel basis to quickly update the picture. For example, this rule cannot be effectively mapped to a target to a display polygon, and the polygon is another display target (hereinafter referred to as the w pattern (please read the back to the note first # 塡 写 此 页) Ministry of Economy The use of the printing of the quasi-authorized shellfish consumer cooperatives is more basic and accurate. After the picture is drawn, the yuan needs to be matched. The back of the yuan 3-shows that the need is the same as the one born. This is a necessary example. The 16-shaped mat is a colored mask. Take * 1 to apply, and try to change the frame to a 7C real device before the success of this picture. Nu. The speed of the dense color base may allow this to change the picture. The effect of the music is wonderful. Yuan painted high noodles. It is painful to have the noodles in the game, and the more dense words are first on the back. Shi Biyi ’s desire for a device to be a pre-approved device is actually framed.霈 JH: You can swim in your eyes, you can enjoy it, you can see it in the basic group, you can see it, and you can see it, jg humanoid empty drawing system, depending on the edge of the appliance. In the meter, such as an electric device, set Yuan Le Qile J ', and issue a multi-three-piece device with a music label position game, tour W. For machine music, the position can be viewed as a small M element. Youtong 1 6 Acupuncture and visual acupuncture electricity standard / intercontinental contraction / position according to the position of the music electric shift technology and the real big Η0〇 yuan electricity here. You Yuan and Zhixian side turn big and do n’t put ¥ know the position. The position of Xi ’s multi-rotation is to retrain 16 for the analysis of electric 16 movements. The application of the above-mentioned method is a comprehensive solution. This shift is very effective and complete and ex reform. Unconventional multi-base up-conversion, U-shape painting, wide-screen surface, special features, twiddles, better spooling, better flatness frame machine, fully packed, ordered-line-this paper scale side use a «家 楳Bi (CNS) T4 specification (210X297 male dragon) 4 81.6. ΙΟ, ΟΟΟίΚΙΙ) 214588 Λ 6 | {6 Printed by the Central Economic Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs KX Consumer Industry Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the invention (5) The edge of the polygon, and The target of this polygon base is a proper pixel-on-pixel · basis. This kind of work, like performing on a tilted pixel-to-pixel basis, consumes a lot of processing time. In the conventional technology, the movable game instrument cassette is modified to improve the compactness of the game instrument, which uses an existing processor to address a larger programming address space, which is larger than the host microprocessor allows. The number of closed address lines. For example, this conventional technology 8-bit system uses a game instrument cassette containing a multi-memory controller crystal H to perform bank switching and other added functions with the crystal H. However, the wafers associated with the 100-megabyte packet switching cannot perform high-speed graphics processing on TV entertainment systems. The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems of the conventional technology, and utilizes to provide a slap unique and fully programmable sap graph processor, whose image is designed in a removable external memory unit, and is connected to a main information processing system . In the embodiment described here, a shovel video game system implemented by the present invention includes a master video game system and a video game instrument cassette, which contains the picture microprocessor. The picture processor and TV musical instrument system contains many unique and excellent features. The following is a summary. According to the present invention, a special graphics drawing processor can be plugged in and connected to a mastermind. For maximum processing speed, the graphics processor can also be operated parallel to the main computer. In one embodiment, the game instrument cassette where the key map processor is located also includes a ROM (ROM) and a RAM (RAM). The graphics co-processor of the present invention is tailored to its own needs and to be charged from the master (please read back and forth at the first time # 蜞 write this page) This paper standard uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) specifications (210x297 Long) 81. 6. 10,000¾ (11) °! 45 δ8 Λ 6 IJ6 Employee's consumption cooperation of the Central Bureau of Economic Development of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Printed five. Description of invention (6) Memory pus change during brain data capture. The processor can simultaneously execute the program with the main brain to allow high-speed processing, prior to the conventional musical instrument system can not be achieved. The picture-co-processor of the present invention is like a three-bus structure connection operation implemented on a game instrument cassette, which allows the effective use of RAM and ROM cassettes and uses the best main processor cassette The ability of both processors to effectively use this memory device. The fully user-programmable co-processor of the present invention, including a unique instruction set, allows high-speed processing. The instruction set can be effectively implemented in relation to 3-D drawing arithmetic and calculations, including, for example, the execution of special instructions using special hard-wired characters, which are used to draw individual pixels on the display of characters from the main TV game console. The instruction set includes unique pixel-based instructions, from the programmer's point of view, such as the use of allowing the addressing of "Qi Cai" pixels to create a tilt, "virtual" bit mapping even if the main rule is a character base. The pixel data and picture processor converts the meta-data. This format is typically used by main character-based 16-bit machines. So, for example, although programmers use a unique w PLOT 〃 instruction to read pixels in a day, when two pieces of data are read into RAM, the data is converted into a slap character base format, which enables the 16-bit host to use. Special-purpose pixel map hardware executes this instruction to effectively allow the implementation of high-speed 3-D key keys. The hardware-in-plane hardware is instantly converted from pixel coordinate addressing to character mapping to addressing, and this main principle of addressing can be used naturally. The best way is that the processor uses the specified X and Y coordinates to write a program, this coordinate is defined on the display surface every pixel position. (Please read the back and the precautions # fill in this page first) Pack. Thread · This paper size is used as a family tree iMCNS) T4 specification (210X297 mm) 6 81.6. 10,000ft (11) 214588 Λ 6 η 6 5 2. Description of the invention (7) Therefore, the execution of the drawing operation is based on the pixels designated by the programmers, and is printed in cooperation with the employees of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Bureau of Biography. Cheng Xiangbiao's operation instructions included in the Ming Fang show that it can be driven by a seat holder. It is a good package tool. It can be used in the system's most powerful management diagram. Yuandi allows a harmonious use-the opportunity of the block is everywhere. It is a precedent of an X-style body, which has a total of block-like look. The detailed drawing of the single drawing of RA, so that the beginning of the drawing box is more like a merging, and it is a block. Kaki's example is more suitable for shadows, and the prime address says that the image of the square device is small in size. One instrumental instrument, one practical operation, one-way into a detailed description of the single-piece instrument, the tour guide and the good tour series, the same as the Υ, the example is the most important one, the most difficult place is not the same as the painting, the rule is easy to apply. The unification and drawing rules, the main species X and the Yuan Shi Rong Shi Yuan, the front art element image in each color are more clear, the main picture is shown in the common eye, and the image is changed to the color of M0, which will be released. The public office indicated that the rendition should be fixed. All the 0 materials and pictures are determined by this system, as shown in this document. It is shown in Fig. 44A. The first step is to show that it is very clear. 0 Licheng Reunion Kuaiyuan is the predecessor of the next system, the system of the system and the system of Aoyu «Yu. The diagram in this article is composed of 1 2 3 and strip 4. 5 Preface < 07 Hard, let ’s choose a 10% rationale. Picture pseudo Η internal diagram Η picture follow the picture after the picture shows the replacement of the best example of the block of the original expression of the main block of the master, the master's work (please read the precautions Sun Xu first Write this page) This paper is used in the national standard (CNS) f 4 specifications (2 丨 0X297 g; it) 7 81.6.! 0,000 * 〇 [) 214538 Λ 6 η 6 Ministry of Economics Bureau of Standards and Ordnance Consumer Cooperation Du Printing 5. Description of the invention (8) The plaque 8A is a block garden that displays the input multiples received by the drawing controller and the output signals generated by the drawing controller. Fig. 8 is a color matrix element of the pixel picture function circuit in the color matrix. FIG. 8C is a more detailed block diagram of the RAM controller shown in FIG. 4A, which is related to the timing, control, and data signals of the pixel drawing circuit. _ 9 A as shown in plaque 9 is related to the timing, control and data signals of the RAM controller. Fig. 10 is a circuit diagram illustrating the arbitration pass shown in Fig. 9. Letter 11 is the resynchronization circuit diagram of the embodiment of the picture coprocessor of the present invention. Plaque 12 is a timing signal description of the resynchronization circuit shown in FIG. 11. Yuan 13 shows a more detailed block of the RAM controller of the painting coprocessor of the present invention. FIG. 14 is a block diagram of a fast controller of a picture garden coprocessor according to an embodiment of the present invention. Circle 15A shows a block diagram showing the instruction decoding related circuit of the graphics coprocessor of the present invention. 15B is like a timing signal, demonstrating the operation of the forward-looking logic in U15A. U16 and 17 pseudo-blocks show the register control logic of the graphics coprocessor according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 18 is a drawing coprocessor for the production of tilted polygons according to the first embodiment (please read the back-end notes # 塡 写 this page) This paper uses the standard of China B Η 楳 楳 (CNS) T4 (210X297); «:) 81. 6. 10,000 sheets (Η) Printed by the Ordnance Industry Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy 214538 V. Description of the invention (9)-The sequence of operation example flow. Figures 19, 20, and 21 show examples of how you can create polygonal base kneading to illustrate the scale and rotation characteristics of dimensions according to an embodiment of the present invention. Too invention; > Musk dwelling hide california note description is as follows: According to this embodiment, the present invention painting garden co-processor interacts with Yi Ren 16 Ren Yuanxiao video game system. This system is like the Super Nintendo Entertainment System (Super NES) sold by Nintendo of America. This Super Nintendo Entertainment System is described in part in US Application No. 07 / 651,265, Image w Image Processing Device, and its application date is April 10, 1991. And the application on August 26, 1991, application number 07 / 749,530, whose name a directly records billions of access devices and external storage devices ". These applications are here for reference. It is understood that the present invention is not limited to the application of Super HES, and it can be applied to other video games or other non-television games and information processing devices. For ease of reference, the graphics processor according to an embodiment of the present invention will hereinafter be referred to as " Mario chip ". The Malio chips described in the current preferred embodiment are packaged in a TV play cassette. It should be understood that the Maliu chip in the present invention does not have to be in the same cassette as the programming memory, as long as it is connected to an extract memory and the main processing unit when in use. Figure 1 is a preferred example of a storage device according to the present invention. An example of a music player cartridge / external record of 100 million. The playing instrument cassette includes a printed circuit board (not shown), on which all the circle 1〆 components are mounted. The cassette includes a row of connectors 1 and it is placed on the embedded end of the printed circuit board. Original paper 5 *: standard use in a clear standard (CNS) T4 specification (210x297 public address) 81.6. 10,000¾ (II) (Please read the back and the precautions # fill in this page first) Pack. Line-214588 Λ 6 15 6 Employee's consumer cooperation of the Central Bureau of Economic Development of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, du printed fifth, invention description table) used in Fu round signal and Main control panel from Super nes. The connector of this column Mildew 1 is accommodated by a mating connector and placed on the Super NES main control board. According to the embodiment of the present invention, the Mali Ou crystal piece (drawing common processor) 2 is provided on the playing instrument cassette, like a piece of 100 to 128-legged Jiu Road crystal piece. Maru Ou Jing H receives many control, address and data signals from the main processing system (such as Super NES). For example, the Maruio chip 2, receives a 21MHz clock signal input from the main processing system via pin P112, and a system time signal input via the PU7-tilt 21MHz (or another predetermined frequency). The input of the remote system clock signal enables, for example, to provide a Malyn processor, to use the main CPU to store the memory timing information of the memory, and to provide the timing operation of the clock signal in the Malyn chip. , Maruio chip 2 also includes a tiltable external clock signal input when sickle (pin 11〇), mesh Maruio chip to an external quartz 4, to drive Maruio CPU, for example, in a tilt It is higher than the frequency clock signal of 21MHZ received from the main system. The main CPU address input (HA) is connected from the main processing (for example, Super NES CPU / Graphic Processing Unit PPU) address bus to the Mullah Crystal H2 via pin P37 to pin P62. Similarly, from the main system data input (Ηβ), the main CPU data bus V is coupled to the Malo chip 2 via pins P65-P72. In addition, the Mali wafer 2 receives a reset signal via pin P119 and a pin P118, and the read and write control signals via pins P104 and P105 receive an update signal RFSH from the main CPU. The Mali chip generates an interrupt request signal IRQ, and erbium combines this signal 1 to the Super NES via pin P120. Receive other control signals from the Super NES, such as a tilted ROMS E £ signal via pin 106, such as used to start a main program i ~ y (please read the notes before you fill in the wooden page) It is accessed with the Chinese Standard (CNS) T4 specification (210x297 male: «:) 10 81. 6. 10,000 sheets (II) 214588 V. Invention description 1 (1) type R0M10. In addition, the cassette also includes a value confirmation processor 3, which exchanges data with a super NES confirmation processor on the input I, output 0, and reset R lines. The confirmation processor 3 and the safety system used for confirming the playing instrument cassette can also refer to US Patent No. 4,799,635. The Maro chip is compatible with KAM6 and 8 傜 RAK address bus (RAM A), with RAM address pins P74-P91, and RAM data bus (RAM D) and data pins P93-1 00. Some RAMs can be dynamic memory devices. The control part uses row and column address strobe signals (R AS, CAS), which are connected via pins P90 and P91. Use one or more Yong RAMs instead of dynamic RAMs, and pins P90 and P91 are used to connect address signals to their different RAMs, without using row and column address pulse signals. The write enable control signal VE is properly meshed to RAM 6 to 8 via pin 107. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the back-to-date precautions and add wooden pages). Use the main CPU to generate read and write control signals (R, W), and pass the 105 is connected to Maru Ou Jing H. By monitoring these read and write signal lines, Malioux chips can determine the nature of the memory access operations that this Super NES CPU attempts to perform. Similarly, from the main system almost all addresses and controls, use the Malio chip supervision to track the trajectory of the main CPU. The ROM and RAM address signals received by the Maru chip are supervised and passed to the appropriate memory device. In this regard, the ROM address is pinned to pins R2 and P26 via the ROM address bus, and is connected to the program R0M10, and the RAM address is pinned to RAM 6 and 9 via pins P74 to P91. Input data from the ROM and RAM of the main CPU, through the ROM data bus and the pins P28-P35, and through the pins P93 to P100 to properly combine to R0H10, Ma Liu »chip can be used to receive a call In addition to the above-mentioned ROM and RAM, the different denominator devices are not. For example, we are planning to use the paper standard in China. A B Jiatbi (CNS) TM specification (2 丨 0x297 male dragon) 11 81. 6. 10,000¾ (H) 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 CX Engineering of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperation Du Printing 5. Description of the invention (1 2) Make Ma Lijing M used in the TV game system with only CD ROM. For example, in Figure 1, a shovel CD ROM (not shown) replaces R0M10 and is used to store character data, program instructions, images, graphics, and audio data. A traditional CD head (also not shown) is suitable for connecting to the Maliou chip 2, receiving billions of addresses from the address bus P2-P26, used to access data from the data bus P28-P35 and // Or instructions. The detailed operations and specific instructions of CD reading and CDR0M storage system are well known to professionals in the industry. Using the advantages of CD ROM storage, it greatly reduces the cost of storing data per byte. The data storage cost may be 100 to 1,000 percent less than the storage cost of semiconductor ROM. However, unfortunately, the CD ROM records 100 million access / readout time, even slower than the semiconductor R 〇 Μ. Ma Liujun Jing H uses a three-bus structure, which allows data to use at least three-tilt bus in parallel. In this regard, as shown in Figure 1, the music instrument cassette, Maruio chip 2 is integrated into a ROM bus (including ROM data line, ROM address line and control line), a RAM bus (including RAM Address lines, data lines, and control lines) and a tilt main processor bus (including main address, data, and control lines). The Maliou wafer structure allows parallel pipeline (Pip ^ ined) operation to occur to obtain the best output capacity. In this regard, the Mario chip reads a byte of data from the ROM, and when processing other data, still writes the data to the RAM to allow 3-D phase drawing to be performed efficiently. As explained further below, the 2CD part of the Maremer wafer uses a 16-bit structure and is still designed to interface with the 8-bit R0M10 and RAM 6, 8-crystal H. The internal registers of all internal data buses are 16 bits, read from R0M10, and write 12 copies of 5JL standard paper to use Chinese National Standard (CNS) T4 specifications (210X297 male dragon) 81. 6. 10,000 sheets ( II) (please read the precautions first and fill in this page) A 6 η 6 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs κχIndustry and Consumer Cooperatives V. Invention Instructions (13) into RAM6, 8, Buffer ", and typical The ground does not slow down the program execution speed. / Similarly, Maru Ou Jing M2 can also access instructions and suspect data from the CD ROM. And write the information into RAM6, 8 and use it for post-embedding DMA to send the image RAM into the main processor, such as Super NES Graphics Processing Unit (PPU). Professionals in this industry will appreciate it, such as the conversion of the programmable data coordinates of the Maliou chip 2 from the CD ROM directly to the PPU's image RAM. Omit storage and access operations through RAM. The extremely fast processing speed of the Maliou chip 2 allows CD ROM storage to be practically used in ring applications, although CD ROM requires long read access times. Before storing the CD and ROM, the image and sound are compressed using the data compression technology of Futong. Data compression and post-original technology are common knowledge for those in the industry. After accessing the compressed data from the CD ROM, Ma Jingxin H2 uses a traditional data recovery algorithm to recover the data, which takes less time than what can be done with a traditional graphics processor. Because it is operated with a dysprosium 21MHZ clock signal, the Maliou chip 2 completes the recovery and transfers the data to the RAM 6 and 8 within a predetermined time period. Therefore, the typical CD ROM access period can greatly access the image and sound Information (compressed form). However, the effect of this relatively long access time is reduced because the actual access time for each data byte is greatly reduced after data recovery using the Malychip 2. When performing recovery using the Maruchip 2, the main graphics processor, such as the super HES PPU, can perform other processing tasks. Of course, if the speed does not need to be tested for another application, then Ma Jing Ou Jing H 2 can access uncompressed data from the CD ROM. (Please read the notes on the back of the page to write a wooden page by Sun Yan) The standard of the S family standard (CNS) (210X297 g; «:) 13 81. 6. 10,000¾ (II) 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 Printed by CX Industrial and Consumer Cooperation, Central Bureau of Economics and Development, Ministry of Economic Affairs. V. Description of Invention d 4) When using static RAM, the cassette may also include a spare battery. A spare backup battery 12 is connected to a conventional backup battery circuit 14 via a tilt resistor R, providing a static RAM and a static RAM chip selection signal RAMCS. A spare backup RAM (RSRAM), if the power supply is lost Can provide a material storage function. In addition, the network is connected to the RAM address bus, and the resistor 16 can be optionally set. During normal operation, the Mario chip address lines are output to RAM 6 and 8. However, during reset and power-on operations, the use of the address line as an input line generates a bow high or low signal depending on whether it is connected to a pre-determined high voltage VCC or ground. In this way, a slap ^ 1 〃 or " 〇〃 is properly read into a stuffed internal Marie Ou Jing H register. After resetting, depending on the different settings of these resistors, Maruio can determine (during program execution), for example, the clock rate of the multiplexer, to the RAM access time of the Maruio chip, use The clock signal rate of other operations in Maruio etc. Through these options, the settings of the register can be set up, and the Mullah chip can be used in many different types of billion-meter memory devices without modifying the design of any Mullah chip. For example, if a dysprosium dynamic RAM setting is detected, the multiple is updated to an appropriate number of times. In addition, the selection setting is used to control the speed, for example, the operation of the processor multiplexer circuit, and allows the use of the lutet processor to execute other instructions at a faster rate to execute certain multiplication instructions. Therefore, with the start of a delayed multiplication execution, the remaining instructions can be executed at a faster clock signal rate (for example, the processor may be set at the clock signal 30MHZ, so selecting the setting will effectively cause the multiplication instruction to execute at 15HHZ). Figure 2 is a block diagram of the main TV game instrument system of a pseudo-embodiment. Its 14 paper standards are used in the B National Standard (CNS) T4 specification (2 丨 0x297mm) 81. 6. 10,000 sheets (II) ( Please read the back-end notes first. Xun writes a wooden page) Λ 6 1 (6 214588 V. Description of invention ί 5) (please read the back-end notes #fill in this page) in the example game instrument card _ 如 圈 1 The designer. _2, for example, the Super NES sold by Nintendo on behalf of the United States. However, the application or rules of the month 1 in the Super NES as shown in H2 #. The Super NES includes a 16-bit main CPU in its control panel 20. For example, it may be a 65 8 16 compatible computer. The CPU22 is meshed to a 1 RAM32, for example, it may include 128 {(byte storage. CPU22 meshed to a ramen-shaped processing unit (PPϋ) 24, in turn cadmium is merged into a stuffed image RAM 30, which may Including, for example, the remaining words. During the vertical or horizontal extinction interval, the CPU 22 accesses the image RAM 30 via the PPU 24, except during the active line scan period, when the PPU 24 accesses the color image RAM. _ Like RAM30, it generates an image to be displayed on the user's video 36. The CPU is also networked to a slap sound processing unit APU26, which is integrated into a working RAM 28. The APU may contain a commercial audio chip, Generate sounds that are related to the TV game program. This program is stored in the R0M10 of the game instrument cassette. The CPU can only access the work RAM28 through the APU26. The PPU24 and APU26 are integrated into the user's home through the RF converter unit 34 TV 36. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Pyongyang Precinct, β Industrial Consumer Cooperative

在超级NES之影像RAM30,必霈載人儲存在卡里程式 R0M11中適當字元資料。(卡匣不只儲存遊樂器程式,並且 在玩遊樂器期間使用字元資料)。任何移動目標,例如幽 靈資訊,或背聚賫訊的顯示•在使用前需放在影像RAM30 内。程式R0M10存取利用CPU22主位址與資料匯流排,經 一鶴配合連接器18網合到如園1所示印刷電路板邊緣連接 器1。PPU24連接到遊樂器卡匣,經共用主CPU資料舆位址 匯流排與連接器23,因此提供一偁路徑,使用於供合PPU 本紙張尺度逍用中a Β家楳準(CNS) Τ4規格(210X297公龙) 15 81. 6. 10,000張(H) Λ6 _____Π_6_____ 五、發明説明(16) (請先間讀背而之注意事項#填寫本兵) 資料舆控制信號到卡匣。APU26共用主CPU匯流排及费音睡 流排27,連接到遊樂器卡匣。 CPU22位址空間係被映至,因此程式R〇M10位置在開始 位置0,並典型地分剌成為32位位元组段程式ROM大約使用 一半的CPU位址空間。在毎個CPU位址空間32K位元段之最 上面位置,典型地使用位址工作RAM32和各種不同暫存器 。程式R0M10典型地為4傾百萬位元組。使用在超级NES之 CPU22能夠定址整鏑程式R0M10。在S —方面,瑪琍歎晶M 2只包括一掴16位元程式計數器,並且因此包括組暫存器 ,使用於蘧擇在程式R0M10中之32K位元組。 於本實施例中,瑪琍歐晶片只有一俱全24位元空間 相對於超级NES記憶黼映至。其包含R0M10起始位址在$ 0 0 : 8 0 01與卡匣上RAM晶片6,8起始位址在$ 70:00 0。 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 由於R0M10和與卡匣上RAM6,8是分開匯流排,因此® 琍歃晶片能平行地存取它們。並且RAM6,8存取速度快& ROM,並且瑪琍歃晶Η設計亦使用此執行優點。瑪 Η不存取在超级NES内任何記億醴,亦即,不存取工# RAM 32或 PPU影像 RAM30。 欲使瑪琍歐晶片處理資料或畫成一届位元映至· M S 料霈包含在瑪辋醱卡匣RAM晶片6,8内。因此•任何NES CPU程式和瑪琍歐晶Μ程式所共同之變數,必需放在 歐卡匣RAM晶Η6,8内。任何瑪琍歐晶片程式所需使用的δ 先餘存資料可以在R0H1I,並且任何變數將在RAM6,8内。 Ο 任何超级NES程式需的専用變數,不箱在卡匣RAM6,8 本紙張尺度逍用中8 B家楳準(CNS)甲4規格(2]0χ297公;¢) 81.6. 10,000» (B) 16 經濟部中央標準而Α工消费合作社印製 21458ο λ 6 ____Π_6__五、發明説明(1 7) 中。事資上,因此RAM6,8是位於記億體空間的較高位址。 最好放置卡匣RAM6,8在离優先霈求的基礎上。任何非必要 變數應儲存在超级HES内部RAM32。 瑪琍歃晶Η所寫入的位元映至,僳在瑪琍歃卡厘RAM 6,8,並且將在超级NES的控制下執行DMA·傅送進人PPU的 影像RAM30,當每傾位元映至圏框完全鎗出時。 假如當瑪琍歃晶片不出現時超级NES的CPU22存取在超 级NES控制板内所有内部RAM。瑪琍歐晶片未存取渣RAM, 因此瑪琍歐R0M/RAM晶片與内部超级HES之間所傅送所有資 料,必需利用CPU22其本身起始。資料傅送可利用CPU22的 程式,或利用DMA傅送移動整塊資料。瑪琍歐卡匣和 RAM6,8,如一般使用於所有遊樂器程式者。 CPU22只有控制器,使得CPU可暫時存取到卡匣或 RAM晶Μ。在電源開啓或重置之條件下,瑪琍歃晶片關閉 ,並且CPU22全部存取於卡匣ROM和Rik晶片。欲使瑪琍歎 晶Η執行一鹤程式•必霈使CPU22程式放棄其到ROM或RAM 晶Η之存取,最好是二者。並且等待瑪琍歃晶片完成它已 指派之工作,或另一方式,CPU22能拷貝某些程式碼到内 部工作RAM32,並且在那裡執行之。 瑪琍歜晶片只有多鑌暫存器,並且可超级NES CPU之 側邊程式或可讀出。映至到CPU22記億釀映至•其起始位 址在 $ 00 : 3000。 如_2所示,超级NES産生和接收不同的控制信號。 當超级NES CPU22需存取程式R0M10時,它産生一個控制倍 (請先閱讀背而之注意事項再墙寫木頁) 裝· 訂_ 線- 本紙張尺度进用中《«家«準(CHS) f 4規格(2]0χ297公龙) 17 81. 6. 10,000張(ί() Λ 6 Π 6 214588 五、發明説明β 8 ) 號ROHSEP。欲起始一個記德龌更新,超级NES則産生一個In the image RAM30 of the Super NES, it is necessary to load the appropriate character data stored in the card program R0M11. (The cassette does not only store game programs, but also uses character data during game play). Any moving objects, such as ghost information, or display of back gathering information • It must be placed in the image RAM30 before use. The program R0M10 access uses the main address and data bus of the CPU 22, and is connected to the edge connector 1 of the printed circuit board as shown in the garden 1 via a crane matching connector 18. The PPU24 is connected to the game instrument cartridge and shares the main CPU data and address bus and connector 23, so it provides a way to use it for PPU. This paper standard is easy to use a Β 家 楳 准 (CNS) Τ4 specifications (210X297 male dragon) 15 81. 6. 10,000 sheets (H) Λ6 _____ Π_6 _____ V. Description of the invention (16) (please read the back and the precautions #fill in the soldier) data and control signals to the cassette. The APU26 shares the main CPU bus and the Feiyin sleep bus 27, which are connected to the game cartridge. The CPU22 address space is mapped to, so the program R0M10 is at the starting position 0, and is typically divided into 32-bit segment program ROMs. About half of the CPU address space is used. At the top of each 32K-bit segment of the CPU address space, the address work RAM32 and various different registers are typically used. The formula ROM10 is typically 4 megabytes. The CPU22 used in the Super NES can address the dysprosium program R0M10. On the S-side, Ma Liutan M 2 only includes a slap 16-bit program counter, and therefore includes a group register, used to select 32K bytes in the program R0M10. In this embodiment, the Mario chip only has a 24-bit space mapped to the Super NES memory. It contains the R0M10 starting address at $ 0 0: 8 0 01 and the starting address of the RAM chip 6,8 on the cartridge is $ 70:00 0. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Because R0M10 and RAM6 and 8 on the cassette are separated from the bus, so ® chip can access them in parallel. And RAM6,8 has fast access & ROM, and the design of Ma Liuxi Jing also uses this execution advantage. Ma H does not access any memory in the Super NES, that is, does not access the work # RAM 32 or PPU video RAM 30. If you want to process data or draw a bitmap of Maruou chips, the M S material is included in the RAM chips 6, 8 of the Maru Cartridge. Therefore, any variables that are common to any NES CPU program and Maru Oujing M program must be placed in the Oka RAM RAM H6,8. The δ pre-remaining data required for any Malyu chip program can be in R0H1I, and any variables will be in RAM6,8. Ο Any variables required for the Super NES program are not included in the cassette RAM6, 8 sheets of paper for easy use 8 B Family Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (2) 0χ297; (¢) 81.6. 10,000 »(B) 16 Printed by the Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by the A-Consumer Cooperative Society 21458ο λ 6 ____ Π_6__ V. Description of the invention (17). In terms of resources, RAM6 and 8 are located at the higher addresses in the memory space. It is best to place the cassette RAM6, 8 on the basis of priority. Any non-essential variables should be stored in Super HES internal RAM32. Bits written by Maruyang Crystal H are mapped to Maru, Cali 6,6,8, and will be executed under the control of Super NES · Fu will be sent to the image RAM30 of the PPU. Yuan Ying until the ring frame is completely shot. Suppose the CPU 22 of the Super NES accesses all the internal RAM in the Super NES control board when the Maruchip does not appear. The Maruio chip does not access the slag RAM, so all data sent between the Maruio R0M / RAM chip and the internal Super HES must be initiated using the CPU 22 itself. For data transmission, the program of CPU22 can be used, or the entire block of data can be moved by DMA transmission. The Maliou Cassette and RAM6,8 are generally used by all game programmers. The CPU 22 has only a controller, so that the CPU can temporarily access the cassette or the RAM chip. Under the condition that the power is turned on or reset, the Maru chip is turned off, and the CPU 22 is completely accessed by the cartridge ROM and Rik chip. To enable Ma Litan to execute a crane program in Crystal H • Must make the CPU22 program give up its access to the ROM or RAM Crystal H, preferably both. And wait for the chip to complete its assigned work, or another way, CPU22 can copy some program code to the internal work RAM32, and execute it there. The MaLiXi chip only has multiple registers, and can be read or read by the side program of the Super NES CPU. From Yingzhi to CPU22, there are 100 million brewing Yingzhi, and its starting address is $ 00: 3000. As shown in _2, the Super NES generates and receives different control signals. When the Super NES CPU22 needs to access the program R0M10, it generates a control times (please read the precautions first and then write the wooden pages on the wall) Binding · Order_ Line-This paper standard is used in "« 家 «准 (CHS ) f 4 specifications (2) 0 × 297 male dragon) 17 81. 6. 10,000 sheets (ί () Λ 6 Π 6 214588 V. Description of the invention β 8) ROHSEP. If you want to start a new update, the Super NES will generate a

L (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#塡寫本頁) 更新信號RFSH。酋瑪琍歐晶片完成一個操作,它傳输一個 中斷信號IRQ於中斷要求線上,像相關於超级HES CPU。此 外,CPU22産生讀和寫信號。 從在控制板20内的時序波道電路21,産生条統時序信 號。在主控制板20内亦産生一値開機/重置信號,並且鍋 合到遊樂器卡匣。 超级HES亦包括一個確認處理裝置25,偽交換在输入 I和输出0的資料。並且根據上述美國專利4,799,635, 在電視遊樂器上重置R導線與一個確認處理裝置3。在美 國專利4,799,635所示處理裝置25中,保持CPU22在重置狀 態,直到建立確認。 經濟部中央櫺準局A工消费合作社印製 如圖2所示方塊圖之超级HES電視遊樂器,在此已一 般性地説明。對於超级NES進一步詳情包括PPU24,可在美 國申請案號07/651,265發現到,其名稱'"影像處理裝置" ,其申謫日1991年4月10日,此申請案在此笛成參考。超 级NES和遊樂器卡匣之間如何傳送資訊,可在美國申請案 號07/749,530,申請日1991年8月26日,名稱、、在影像處 理条統與外部儲存裝置,所使用之直接記億體存取裝置〃 ,以及美國申讅案號07/ 7 93,7 35,申讅日1991年11月19日 ,其名稱a嵌鑲圖形顯示裝置與在此使用外部儲存單元" 。這些申讅於此當成參考。 某些應用方面,發明人已認知,在垂直熄滅期間需傅 送多資訊,多於主處理DM A電路實際所能傳送者。因此, 本紙51尺度逍用中a B家標準(CNS) T4規格(210x297公龙) 18 81. 6.丨0,000張(H) 21.4588 Λ 6 Μ 6 經濟部屮央櫺準局β工消伢合作社印製 五、發明説明{ 9 ) 也許期望的延伸垂直熄滅時間。甚至可引起稍撖縮小圖形 的大小。利用此方法,最大的優點在於處理速度和圖形的 更新速率。 園3傑範例機械設計的透視圖,一個遊樂器卡匣盒19 ,使用於安置瑪琍歐晶片和如圖1所示其它卡匣結構。類 似地,圈3係一掴範例外殼的透視圖,使用於一個電視遊 樂器控制板20,與安置如圖2所示超级HES電視遊樂器硬 體。使用於此種電視遊樂器控制板20,與相醑可移動遊樂 器卡匣19之機械設計,可參考美國申讅案號07/748, 938, 申請日1991年8月2日,名稱、、TV遊樂器",此申請案在此 當成參考。 圖4A和4B偽如圔1所示瑪琍歐晶H2的方塊圖。首先 注意集中在圖4A和4B各種不同之匯流排。指令匯流排 IHSTI?僳一個8位元匯流排,其耩合指令碼到各種不同瑪 荆歃晶Η組件。X, Y和Z匯流排是16位元資料匯流排。 ΗΑ匯流排是一個24位元主条統位址匯流排。在目前最佳實 施例中,使用於讲合到超级NES位址匯流排。HD匯流排是 一値8位元主資粁匯流排,使用於縝合到超级NES資料匯 流排。PC匯流排是一健16位元匯流排,其鍋合瑪荆歐晶片 程式計數器的输出(例如,在一般暫存器方塊76暫存器R15 ),到各種不同条統的組件。ROMA匯流排是一個20位元 ROM位址匯流排。ROM D匯流排是一値8位元ROM資料匯流j 排。RAM A匯流排是一偏位元RAM位址匯流排。RAMD-IN匯 流杂是一個8位元RAM黷資料匯流抹。以及RAMD-0UT是一 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙堪寫本頁) 裝- 線- 本紙51尺度逍用中a B家標準(CNS)肀4規格(210x297公;¢) 19 81.6. 10,000» (II) Λ 6 Π 6 3i4588 五、發明説明6 〇 ) 値8位元R A Μ寫資料匯流排。/ 瑪琍歃晶片與超级NES共用卡匣RAM6,8,此RAM當成瑪 琍歃晶Η與超级NES間傳送資料的主要機構。超级HES經位 址和資料匯流排ΗΑ和HD,存取瑪琍歐晶片。瑪琍歐晶片暫 存器76,經超级NES位址匯流棑ΗΑ,利用超级HES存取之。 超级HES經瑪琍歐晶片2,存取卡匣程式R0M10和RAM6,8 。ROM控制器104和RAM控制器88,接收利用超级NES所産生 之記德膿存取相鼷信號,以個別起始ROM和RAM記億體存取 。以實施例說明之,瑪琍歃晶片2使用一個RAM選擇信號 RAMCS,以認實超级NES正企圈定址此RAM。 在腫4A和4B所示X, Y和Z匯流排,僳内部瑪琍歐晶片 資料匯流排。X和Y匯流排是來源資料匯流排,並且Z資 料匯流排為一傾目地匯流排。這些匯流排攜有16位元平行 資料。 當執行指令時,瑪琍歐晶片2把一個指令的資料的來 源放在X和/或Y匯流排上,並在Z匯流排上放目的資料 。例如,在執行一艟指令時,把二鏟暫存器的内容相加, 並且把結果放在第三個暫存器。算術和邏輯單元(AUU50, 經X和Y匯流排接收二個來源暫存器的内容。並且網合其 結果到Z匯流排(其次供合到在方塊76内的一値待定暫存 器)。在瑪琍歐晶片2上利用指令解碼電路60,從一個指 令操作碼的解碼所得到控制信號,鍋合至ALU50以起始一 個ADD操作。 從對圓1的説明註解,瑪琍歐晶Η鍋合到一傾R〇H匯 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙增艿本頁) 裝· 線_ 經濟部屮央櫺準局Μ工消费合作社印製 本紙張尺度边用中國國家榣準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公;«:) 20 81. 6.】0,000張⑻ A 6 B 6 S145B8 五、發明説明fel) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項*塡寫木頁) 流排,一個RAM匯流排,和一個超级NES主匯流排,均能平 行地通信。瑪琍歃晶片2監督,經主超级NES匯流排傳输 之控制,位址與資料倍號•以決定主糸統正執行那一傾操 作。卡匣ROM匯流排和卡匣RAM匯流排平行地存取,依任何 已知時間執行中的超级NES操作而定。在傳統超级NES電視 遊樂器卡匣中,主CPU位址與資料線直線縝合到RAM和ROM, 因此,RAM和ROM不能平行地存取。 根據本發明的一個觀點,瑪琍歃晶片2實如圏1所示 ,從超级NES匯流排分離ROM匯流排和RAM匯流排。瑪琍歐 晶片2監督在超级HES匯流排上傳输的信號。並且決定那 個信號需網合到ROM晶片和RAM晶片,經遇二催分離ROM和 RAM匯流排,由於此匯流棑不是時間分割的。利用分離 ROM和RAM匯流排,瑪锎歐晶片2能同時地從ROM謓和寫到 RAM中。由此方式,瑪琍歐晶Η能有效地使用於較便直 ROM晶片,因此晶片的存取時間大幅地慢於RAM存取時間, 且在存RAM之前,不用等待RAM存取的完成。 經济部屮央櫺準局A工消费合作社印製 圖4A中,如上所述,瑪琍歐晶片2你完全可程式處理 器,並且包括一俚ALU50。ALU50執行所有算術功能均在瑪 荆歐晶晶片内,除了乘法是操作乘法器64執行,並且利用 畫圈硬鼸處理某些像素畫圈操作。從指令解碼器60接收一 儀適當控制信號,此ALU50執行加法、減法、互斥或、移 位與其它操作。如圏4A所示,ALU50從X、Y匯流排接收將 操作之資訊,執行此操作的起始,利用從指令解碼器所 接收的一餹控制信號。並且網合操作的結果到z匯流排。 本紙張尺度逍用中a國家樣準(CNS) T4規格(210x297公龙) 81. 6. 10,000張(Π) 2 1 % Λ 6 It 6 經濟部中央櫺準局GX工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明) 圖6將進一步詳細說明A LU。 此外,瑪琍歐晶片2包括特殊目的硬體,以致能3-D 型待殊效應和其它繪團操作有效執行,因此使用這些功能 的霄視遊樂器能實際建成。瑪琍歟晶片2包括畫圏硬腥 52,協助在即時從像素座揉位址,轉換成為超级NES自然 使用的字元映至位址。其優處為,在瑪琍歐晶片上寫程式 ,可利用指令Χ,Υ座檩,以定義在顯示銀幕畫面上每個像 素的位置。 因此,執行匾形操作基於一铕程式者所指定像素,並 且晝圈硬體霣路52可立即轉換所指定像素成為適當格式的 字元資料。然後,字元資料映至到所期望位置,使用於顯 示在超级NES影像30,如團2所示。於此方式中瑪琍歐晶 Η程式者只餺把超级HES影像RAM30當成一艢位元映至,而 實際上它是一個字元映至。 耋圖硬髏52響應各種不同畫團相関指令,以允許可程 式的選擇在顯示銀幕畫面上之X和Υ座標,以及對一個特 定像素的一倨預先決定色彩,與畫到相開像素,因此,χ 和Υ座標轉換相簡於一籲字元定義之一個位址,此宇元定 義的形式使用於驅動超鈒HES影像RAM30。 畫圖硬釀52具有相闋資料閘門,可允許在寫到卡匣 RAM之前,嫌可能缓衝像素資料,以使RAM資料變動最小。 在X和Y座樣資料轉換與缓衝在畫圖硬醱52後,字元界定 資料傅送到卡匣RAM。 耋圖硬體經一傾PL0TX暫存器56和PL0TY暫存器58,個 (請先間讀背而之注意事^孙填寫木頁) 裝. 線- 本紙張尺度遑用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公釐) 22 81. 6. 10,000¾ (II) Λ 6 116 五、發明説明$ 3) 別接收X、Υ座標資料。在目前最佳實施例中· PL0TX和 PLOTY暫存器不是分開暫存器(如躧4A所示),但是瑪網歎 晶片的一般暫存器(亦即,鼸4B所示,在暫存器方塊76中 之暫存器R1與R2)。 畫圖硬鐮52亦經一偏色彩暫存器54,接收像素色彩資 訊。如下所説明·毎偏像索的色彩是健存在一健8X8暫存 器矩陣,其中每镧像素色彩規格佔一列的矩陣。 畫國硬鼸52處理與鍋合相關於X、Y之宇元位址和資料 ,及色彩輸入到字元RAM6,8。字元位址經输出線53向前到 RAM控制器88,及到一個RAM位址匯流排RAMA。宇元資料經 輪出線55,多工器93和RAM資料匯流排RA(D-out,到字元 RAM。畫圖硬腰52允許在字元内能鏑別定址到像素,因此 提供程式者一偏"虚"位元映至顯示条統。當保持和超级 HES宇元格式相容時。、、虛"位元映至保持在卡匣RAM中, 在毎届框的顯示完成傅送到超级NES影像RAM30,你使用 ,例如,一 eDMA®路於上述申請案諕07 /7 49,530中。耋 圏硬膿52允許离速個別像素控制•因此某些3-D繪圏效應 包含旋轉和尺寸大小變化·而成為實際可行。 因為由像素轉換成為字元格式,畫圃硬煙52亦從一個 卡匣RAM6,8經RAMD-in資料門閂82和输入線83,接收相蘭 於目前像素X, Y的週圃其它像素之資訊。利用從RAM6, 8所 取出先前像素資料,並且暫時健存在RAM資料門問中,則 寫到RAM的次數是最小的。如圖4A所示RAM資料門R80,84 和86,亦笛成级衝所接收相對,個^ ^之色彩資料;此像 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙艰寫本頁) 裝_ 經濟部中央標準局Μ工消费合作社印製 本紙》又度逍用中S Η家«準(CNS) Ή規格(2丨0x297公;¢) 23 81. 6.】0,000張(II) Λ 6 Β 6 ,'4538 ;;i ·- 五、發明説明会4) 素已儲存在卡匣RAM中之多位元平面,以提供耋圖硬豔52 之資料/ RAM資料門閂80網合到超级NES匯流排,因此超级HES 能讀出資料門閂的内容。利用RAM控制器88控制RAM資料門 閂80, 82, 84及86。RAM資料門閂84和86操作,從RAM6.8 接收資料,及從RAM6,8縝合資料到目地Z匯流排,使用載 入暫存器方塊76中一掴預先決定暫存器。此外,縝合到 控制器88是一個門閂90,像緩衝RAM位址。在門閂90所儲 存位址,像RAM控制器88經RAM A匯流排,使用於定址 RAM6.8。RAM控制器亦可利用超级NES經位址匯流排HA存取 Ο 畫匾硬醱5 2亦響應一镳R E A D P I X E L指令,像讀此像素 色彩資訊,利用暫存器R1的内容定義一個水平位置,與暫 存器R2的内容定義一値垂直位置,並且所得結果經由目地 Z匯流排和输出線87,放在暫存器方塊76的一値預先決定 暫存器。PLOT硬體52將以圖7、8A和8B進一步詳細說明。 平行管道缓衝暫存器62和一値ALU控制器指令解碼器 62,縞合到指令匯流排INSTR,並操作以産生控制信號 〇 CTL(使用输出此瑪琍歃晶片),瓣應於放置在指令匯流排 上的命令以起始操作。瑪琍歐晶片2像一掘平行管道撤處 理器,當它在執行目前指令時,它抓取下一傾將要執行的 指令。平行管道暫存器2儲存將要執行的下一個指令,因 此假如可能的話,允許一値遇期執行指令。放在指令匯流 排的指令,操利用儲存在一傾暫存器的程式計數器的内 24 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項洱填寫本頁) 裝_ 線· 經濟部屮央櫺準局A工消费合作杜印製 本紙張尺度逍用中B國家標準(CNS)T4規格(210X297公;«:) 81 _ 6. 10,000張(II) 經濟部屮央櫺準局员工消费合作社印製 扒4以8 Λ 6 __[i_6_ 五、發明説明炎5 ) 容定址,此暫存器例如圖4B所示在暫存器方塊76中之暫存 器 R15〇 利用瑪辋歐晶片2執行指令,也許從如圖1所示程式 R0M10所獲得,或瑪琍歐内部快速RAM94,或者從卡匣 RAM6.8。假如將執行程式從R0H10取出,ROM控制器104(如 麵4B所示)将抓取這指令,並且將它放在瑪琍歐晶片指令 匯流排INSTR。假如程式指令儲存在快速RAM94中,則此指 令直接從快速RAM94經快速RAM輸出匯流排95,放在指令匯 流排上。 主CPU,亦即,超级NES,被規劃配置部份的程式 R0M10,使用於瑪琍歃晶Η程式指令。超级HES程式命令瑪 琍歃晶片,執行一艟預先決定之功能,並且提供瑪琍歐晶 Η在R0M10的位址,使用存取瑪琍歃晶Η的程式碼。平行 管道暫存器62,在指令被執行的一掴位元之前抓取指令, 提供指令解碼器60之指令相闋資訊,使得解碼器能夠預測 在程式執行期間將發生什麽,因此允許向前看到相醑處理 。方塊60解碼和控制霣路産生控制信號,用於命令ALU50, 畫面硬體52,快速控制68等,以執行利用將被執行指令所 指示之操作。 瑪琍歃晶片亦包括一傾高速平行乘法器64,係從 ALU50分離出。乘法器64響應預先決定指令,操作從X和 Υ來源之匯流排所接收2傾8位元數目相乘,並且載入此 16位元結果到目地Ζ匯流排。假如可能在一個遇期執行此 乘浬算。輪入到乘法器64之數目可以有正負號或無正負號 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#塡寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逍用中a 81家標毕(CNS) Τ4規格(210x297公:«:) 25 81. 6. 10,000張(II) 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部屮央櫺準局貝工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明) 。乘法器亦能執行長乘法蓮算,其中二鏑16位元數目相乘 ,以産生一儀32位元的結果。乘法器64亦包括相闌部份乘 稹暫存器66,在乘蓮算期間俥儲存部份的乘稹。從指令解 碼器60利用一 β控制信號致能乘法器64,當解碼到一傾乘 法蓮算時。乘法器64將執行16位元的乘法之長乘法指令. 在一鏑最小的4個時間倍號通期内執法。 長乘法指令的格式: R4(較低字組),DREG(較高字組"Sreg^Re。執行這指 令,像利用轚存器R6的内容乘法以來源暫存器,並且儲存 一毓32位元结果在暫存器R4/DREG(較低/較高)中。乘法有 正負號,則在32位元結果上設定零和信號旗擦。 根據下列6傾步驟執行蓮算: 步期1:無正負號乘R4[0…15]=SREG[0…7]SR6[0…7]。 步驟2: X有〆正負號〇 R4 [。…15]=R4[0…15]+2 56* SREG[8…15]*R6[0…7]。忽略乘積的較高8 位元,但從加法的進位保留。 步驟3: X有正負號.R5[0…15]=CY+U6[8…15]s SREG[0…+ 256;正負號延伸。 步«4: X無正負號。Y有正負虢。R4[0…15]=R4[0 …15]+256*SREG[0…7]*R6[8…15]。忽略乘 稹的較离8位元,但保留從加法的進位。 步 »5: Y 有正負號。R5[0 …15]=R5[0 …15]+CY + SREG[0 …7]*R6[8 …15]) + 256;正負號延伸。 步 »6: X.Y有正負號。R5[0…15]=R5[0…15]+RY[8… 15] *R6 [8- 15] 〇 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙瑱窍木頁) 本紙张尺度遑用中Η B家楳毕(CNS) f 4規格(210x297公龙) 26 81. 6. ]0,000張(H) 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 經沭部中央標準局貝工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明) 本實施例所使用之乘法器64,在、、數位計算機算術" 害中有說明。 參照圈4Β,快速控制器48(於圈14有進一步詳細顯示) ,允許一個程式者,對於部份程式期望於高速執行,則有 效起始載入快速RAM94中。此種、、快速#典型地使用於執 行小的程式循琛,像經常在繪圏處理時發生。瑪琍歐晶片 指令集包括一個'"CAWE々指令。任何在CACHE指令後指令 CM ,均載人到快速RAM中直到快速RAM滿為止。當執行 CACHE指令時,目前程式計數器狀態載入到快速基底暫存 器70。因此,快速基底暫存器的内容,定義此快速將被 起始的開始位置。 大部份指令在一偁週期内執行。從相對之低外部記億 體,例如R0M10,或RAM6, 8的指令,在它們被執行之前就 先抓取者。此將花費一個額外6的週期。欲增進程式執行 速度,應使用在瑪琍歃晶本身内的快速RAM94。 快速RAM94可為一個512位元組指令快速記億體。比較 於平均程式的大小,前者像相對地小。因此,程式者必需 決定如何適當使用快速記德94。任何程式循琛能在512位 元組快速記憧醱之大小,能以全速度執行,亦即抓取和執 行均在一傾遇期。因為分開的匯流排,當執行從内部快速 記億體94之碼時,能同時存取ROM和RAM二者。 快速RAM94宜使用於旋轉一錮幽$ (Sprite),利用執 行在快速記億體94内的一個循琛。當它執行旋轉和尺寸大 (請先閱讀背而之注意事項再填寫木頁) 本紙張尺度边用中國國家榣準(CNS)T4規格(210X297公*) 81. 6. 10,000張(II) 27 Λ 6 B 6 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明? 8 ) 小變化的計算時,將從R0M10中讀出每値像素的色彩。它 使用PLOT指令(將於下面說明),以寫入像素到RAM6, 8。 所有皆平行地發生,最慢操作將使其快速慢下來。最慢操 作經常是ROM資料抓取,就是所設計的瑪琍歐晶片,使用 缓衝存取於ROM和RAM中。 當和相對地慢R0M10的執行相比較,一個程式在快速 RAM94執行速度有6倍之快。但首先它必須從ROM載人到快 速記憶體94内。執行這項工作像利用任何要收到快速記憶 臛的循琛開始,放置一俩指令。只有循琿的第一個512位 元組,從CACHE指令的位址取出和放人快速記億體。當執 行第一鵃重覆的循琛碼時,程式從R0M10來,並且以16位 元組拷貝到快速RAM中。所有進一步循環之重覆將來自快 速RAM94,而非R0M10中。 CACHE指令使用於任何重覆程式循環的前面。只有循 璟的後鑛重覆從快速記億獲得好處。假如程式循環大於 512位元組,並且超過快速記億體94,它將仍正確地工作, 只不遇第一齒512位元組從快速記億體94執行,但其餘仍 和平常一樣從R0M10執行。這可提昇部份速度,但並非理 想的。 在最佳實施例有一個快速樣識位元暫存器7 2,像快速 控制器68的一部份,用於識別已載入快速RAM94記億體位 置。快速標識位元允許瑪琍歐晶Η快速地決定,是否從較 快的快速RAM取得可執行的程式指示,而不是從程式 R0M10。利用快速控制器68或超级NES經超级HES位址匯流 (請先閱讀背而之注意事項#塡寫木頁) 本紙張尺度边用中8B家樣準(CNS)f4規格(2】0X297公龙) 28 8K6. 10,000張(1〇 214588 Λ 6 η 6 五、發明説明β 9 ) 排HA經多工器96,以存取快速RAM。 快速控制器68耩合到程式計數器匯流排PC,以載入快 速基底暫存器70,並且執行快速記億臛位址超出範圍之檢 査操作。 類似於從R0M10可完成的平行讀出,瑪琍歐晶片亦提 供平行寫到RAM6, 8的方式。不論何時瑪琍歐暫存器寫到 RAM6, 8,它將起始,例如在RAM控制器88的一傾分離RAM 寫入霄路,以執行記億鼸變動。這典型地需6個週期,當 它如此執行時,它將不延遲處理器。假如程式者在此時間 避免另一鏑RAM變動。例如,在每艏儲存指令間交叉間隔 其它處理是較快的。以這方式RAM寫電路才有時間做它的 工作。假如二個寫使用在一行内,當第一個在寫時,第二 傾將延羥處理器。 例如(所使用的從指令集而來之指令,將在下面説明) (請先間讀背而之注意事項#蜞寫木頁) 經濟部屮央櫺準局只工消费合作社印製 FROM R8 ; 儲存R8到 (R13) SH (R13) SM (R14) 儲 存 R0到 (R14) TO R1 FROM R2 ADD R3 執 行 :r 1 =r 2 + r 3 TO R4 FROM R5 ADD R6 ; 執 行 :r 4 =r 5 + r 6 本紙張尺度逡用中明S家標準(CNS) T4規格(210X297公Λ) 29 81. 6. 10,000張(11) Λ G η 6 214588 五、發明説明(3 0) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫木頁) 注意,二傾儲存指令相互太靠近。第二掴將需6值遇 期,因為RAM匯流排正忙於試著完成第一個儲存指令。 一個比較好寫程式的方式,偽二個儲存指令之間有其 它有用碼分開,則能達成較快的執行速度。例如: FROM R8 ; 儲 存 R8到 (R 13) SM (R1 3) TO R 1 FROM R2 ADD R3 f 執 行 : r 1 =r 2 + r3 TO R4 FROM R5 ADD R6 執 行 r 4 =Γ 5 + r 6 SM (R 1 4) 執 行 R0到 (R 14) 依此方 式, 同 時平 行 執 行 幾 個 更多指令, 指令結果寫入RAM,然後,第二個儲存指令在幾個週期後 執行。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 以下說明指令集,包括一値快速指令,偽用於寫回一 傾暫存器到最後使用RAM位址。這允許 > 大量〃資料處理, 利用從RAH載入之值,在它上面做某些處理,然後再快速 儲存回去。 如圖4B, —梅立即資料門閂74網合到指令匯流排。此 資料門閂74允許指令它本身提供資料的來源,因此這指令 不需指令來源暫存器。立即資料門閂74的輪出網合到目地 匯流排Z。依序地讲合到暫存器方塊76之一値預先決定暫 30 本紙張尺度边用中國Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公士) 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明(3 ^ 存器。指令解碼電路60解碼一梅a立即〃資料指令,並且 起始適當的傅送之執行到暫存器操作。 如圖4B所示,GETB暫存器98用於連接上述顯示/緩慢 讀操作。在此方面,假如廣泛使用相對之低存取時間ROM, 習知微處理器典型地必須等待,直到完成一値資料抓取, 不論何時執行一匍ROM。利用下述延運/緩衝抓取機構,當 資料抓取完成時,也可執行其它操作。根據該機構,假如 在暫存器方塊76的暫存器R14以任何方式存取或修改,自 動地起始ROM或RAM抓取,其位址則利用R14的内容所識別。 如圈4B所示,暫存器R14耩合到ROM控制控制104。在 任何時間以任何方式修改暫存器R14的内容時,ROM控制器 104操作俾起始一傾ROM存取。存取ROM的結果經多工器102 載入GET B暫存器98。縞合到ROM資料匯流排ROM D。指令識 別以下允許存取緩衡在GET B暫存器98之資訊。這資訊經多 工器100載入目地匯流排Z,並且然後進入在暫存器方塊 76的一傾暫存器。 依此方式,假如從ROM抓取的資料,你已知其需多少 健預先決定的處理週期。因此能起如抓取並且不用等待與 執行其它操作。瑪琍歐晶片能執行,例如,不相關碼,在 此種資料抓取已起始後。GET B暫存器亦用於儲存從R0M6, 8經多工器102所取出的資訊,如圖4B所示。 暫存器方塊76共有16艏16位元暫存器(R0〜R15)。暫 存器R0〜R13是一般目地暫存器(雖然某些暫存器用於特殊 目的,如下所說明)。如上所述,暫存器R14使用於當成讀 本紙張尺度逍用中國a家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公史) 3 1 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再堝寫本頁) 裝· 訂- 線· 214588 Λ 6 η 6 經濟部中央櫺準局貝工消t合作社印製 五、發明説明(3 2) 記億體的指標,並且,當修改時,從ROM(或RAM)起始一餹 讀遇期。所讀位元組儲存在一値暫時緩衝匾(GET B暫存器 98),像於較後利用一傾GET L或GET Η命令存取。暫存器 R 1 5是程式數器。它指到將被抓取的下一値指令的開 始。 暫存器R0是一般目的暫存器,係典型地當成一個累稹 器。對於大部份單遇期指令言,它亦預設來源和目地暫存 器。假如,例如,期望將R0和R4的内容相加在一起,它只 需指示R 4暫存器。 Rll, R12和R13暫存器待別使用於執行一値循環指令 。R13暫存器儲存將執行循環的最上面的位址,與R12暫存 器儲存將被執行循環的次數的數目。假如暫存器R12的内 容是非零的,然後在R13的内容所指定住址之指令,被載 入程式計數器(R15)且執行。在循琿完成後,返回的位址 儲存在暫存器R 1 1。 暫存器控制邏輯78耦合到暫存器方塊76,並且控制存 取一般暫存器R0到R15。依將被執行持定指令的格式而言, 指令解碼邏輯60將指令1或多艏暫存器R0〜R15。暫存器 控制邏輯78指定暫存器,這些暫存器在執行下一個指令時 ,都將需要使用者。暫存器控制邏輯78網合適當暫存器的 输出,到X和Υ匯流排。此外,如圖4Β所示,這適當暫存 器R0〜R15從Ζ匯流排,於暫存器控制78的控制下接收資 訊。 ROM控制器104接收從超级NES位址匯流排ΗΑ的位址, (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再堝寫本頁) 裝· 訂- 線. 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297H) 32 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 9,14588_Lii 五、發明説明(3 3) 或瑪琍歐晶片將存取該位址。ROM控制器104如圖13%示將 近一步詳細說明。從R0M10所存取資訊,被載入快速 RAM94,係用於快速指令執行。ROM和RAM控制器104, 108 只有匯流排伸裁單元,其伸裁超级NES與瑪琍歐晶之間的 存取企圖。 底下將進一步說明,瑪琍歐晶片亦使用狀態暫存器, (亦即,在暫存器方塊76或在RAM6, 8内),它可利用超级 NES CPU存取,並且儲存旗標用於識別狀態條件,例如零 旗樣,進位旗標,正負號旗標,溢位旗標,a G0"旗樣( 當1指示瑪琍歃晶片正執行中,以及0指示瑪琍歐片停止 );一傾ROM位元組抓取正在中的旗檫(指示暫存器R14已被 存取)。各種不同模式指示旗標,包括一摘ACT1旗標, ACT2旗標;立即低位元組和立邸高位元組旗標;與旗標指 示來源及目前暫存器,已被一個> with 〃前置指令及一個 中斷旗標設定1。 瑪琍歐晶片代表方塊圈在圃4 A與4B之形式,利用超级 NES在一秒中内多次打開或蘭閉瑪琍歟晶片以執行工作。 起始時,當超级NES打開,儲存在R0M10的遊樂器程式開始 啓動。須注意,在利用超级NES和瑪琍歐晶片處理器之遊 樂器程式執行之前,首先確認遊樂器卡匣。如實施例的方 式,此確認的發生像利用起始而使超级NES CPU在一個重 置狀態下,並且確認處理器執行相鼷於遊樂器卡匣和超级 NES主控制板之確認程式。即根據美國專利案4,799,635的 方式。 (請先間讀背而之注意事項孙填寫木页) 本紙ifc尺度逍用中B B家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公*) 33 A 6 η 6 o-^A^Bo_ 五、發明説明¢4) 起始地,瑪琍歃晶片像在鼷閉狀態。在逭時間,/超级 NES具有無任何限制存取到遊樂器卡匣程式ROM,及遊樂器 卡匣RAM。當超级NES需使用瑪琍歐晶片處理能力,以執行 縉圖操作或數學計算時,超级NES在卡匣RAM中,儲存給瑪 琍歃晶片處理的適當資料(或預先決定瑪琍歐暫存器);並 且在瑪琍歃晶片程式計數器中,載入將被執行瑪琍歐程式 的位址。利用瑪琍歐晶片處理資料,也許是目標的預先決 定X, Y座標資料,該目標餺旋轉和放大或縮小。瑪琍歐晶 能執行程式,其實施演算法以操縱不同數目移動目標的前 景和背景。使用瑪琍歐晶片速度增進硬體與軟體,以獲得 此操作可在很高速度執行。 使用瑪琍歃晶片處理幽靈,能大幅地擴張整體電視遊 樂器条统的能力。例如,超级NES限制每個圖框顯示128個 幽靈,但使用瑪琍歐晶片可達到數百個幽趣顯示,以及例 如旋轉。 當瑪琍歐晶片完成超级NES所要求功能。執行一艟 STOP指令。並且産生中斷信號,並被傅輸到超级NES ,以 指示瑪琍歐晶Η完成它的操作,依序地指示它準備執行下 一鏑工作。 亦可使用瑪琍歐晶片執行小的工作,例如一個高速乘 法工作,或者使用於畫出全銀幕的幽S。在這工作中,超 级NES自由地和瑪琍歐晶片平行處理,假如超级NES遠離 RAM或ROM匯流排,當匯流排瑪琍歃晶Μ使用時。假如超级 NES給瑪琍歐晶片,在遊樂器卡匣上RAM和ROM匯流排的控 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫木頁) 裝· - 線. 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作杜印製 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公;«) 34 Λ 6 η 6 五、發明説明g5) (請先間讀背而之注意事項再填寫木3) 制下,則超级NES能執行其工作RAM32範鼷外程式,如圏2 所示。因此,整德条統的输出增加,利用從-式ROM中拷 貝將被執行的一摑超级NES程式,到它的工作RAM中。同時 ,利用瑪琍歃晶Μ執行一個程式。 _5所示的流程圖,代表著主CPU(例如超级NES CPU) 執行一握I"執行瑪琍歃#程式之操作順序,像用於起始瑪 琍歐晶片,從ROM所需位址抓取和執行程式碼。圖5所代 表常式,將典型地被超级NES CPU所執行,在如圈2所示 之從程式R0M1O拷貝常式到其工作RAM32,在任何時間,當 要求瑪琍歐晶Η執行一艏操作時,刖主CPU執行這常式。 在方塊1 2 5所示,當執行w執行瑪琍歐"主C Ρ ϋ常式, 執行起始操作,包括保存超级NES暫存器。於起始步驟期 間,該常式從程式R0M10拷貝到主CPU工作RAM32。 如方塊127所示,R0M10碼組儲存將被執行的瑪琍歐程 式碼,載入到一倨瑪琍歐晶片暫存器。此外,在碼組内實 際位址儲存在瑪琍歐晶片銀幕畫面基底暫存器,如方塊129 所示。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 此後,如方塊131所示,在瑪琍歐晶片設定I/O輸入/ 输出楔式,以資識別是否使用4, 16,或256色彩模式。此 模式相闋於主CPU操作之色彩楔式。此外,模式設定用以 定義銀幕畫面顥示字元數目的高度。 模式位元係被設定,將ROM和RAM匯流排的控制給瑪琍 歐晶片。分離地可選擇ROM和RAM匯流排之控制,因此設定 瑪琍歐片到一艏模式,即它存取於ROM匯流排,RAM匯流排 本紙張尺度边用中國Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公 35 Λ 6 Π 6 - 五、發明説明(36) (請先間讀背而之注意事項再填寫木") 或二者。因此,若是Α瑪琍歐擁有者〃棋式之設定於ROM 和RAM,則主CPU不能從或到ROM或RAM讀式或寫。須注意, 當瑪琍歐晶片正在使用程式ROM匯流排,假如主CPU企圖存 取程式ROM,則有一艏機構使得瑪琍歐晶片傳回假位址給 超级NES。跳到此位址而保持超级NES佔有,直到瑪琍晶片 不再霈存取卡匣ROM匯流排。 如方塊133所示,在瑪琍歐晶片程式計數器載入一儲 位址,此位址儲存箸瑪琍歐常式需執行的第一値指令後, 瑪琍歐晶Η開始操作。 然後,主C P U等待從瑪琍歐晶片(方塊1 3 5 )來的一値中 斷倍號。笛接收一傾中斷信號時,通知超级NES瑪琍歐晶 片已完其操作,並且已停止(方塊137)。假如未接收到此 中斷信號,則主CPU»鳙等待一個中斷(方塊135)。超級 NES也許在這遇期間,平行地和瑪辋歐晶片執行程式碼, 利用執行它的工作RAM32範圓之外,如圖2所示。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 接著,超级NES檢査狀態暫存器(例如瑪琍歐晶Η暫存 器方塊76),以決定是否已設定瑪琍歐晶片"GO 〃旗標, 此旗樣指示瑪琍歐晶片係在操作中(137)。此外,在瑪琍 歃晶Η狀態暫存器設定一鏑中斷旗擦,用以指示主CPU所 接收之中斷信號,瑪琍歐晶片是以中斷信號的來源。因此 ,在主CPUU35)接收一艏中斷信號後,測試適當的瑪琍歐 狀態暫存器,以決定是否瑪琍歐晶片為中斷的來源(相對 於例如一届垂直熄滅間隔的中斷信號)。假如瑪琍歐晶片 已停止(137),然後對ROM和RAM瑪琍歐擁有者模式位元被 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公婕) 36 Λ 6 η 6 經濟部中央標準局员工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明(3 7) 淸除。並且超级HES完全存取於ROM和RAM。超级HES離開常 式(141),返回到其程式進入執行瑪琍歃常式之前的地方 Ο 當CPU22遊樂器程式將瑪琍歐晶片轉成ROM瑪琍歐擁有 者楔式。它必霈自願停止存取該ROM。不論何時,CPU22為 相同理由需存取ROM時,它只有開閉ROM瑪荆歐擁有者模式 。瑪琍歐晶片将自動停止,當其下一之次需存取此R0H, 直到它再回到ROM瑪琍歐擁有者模式時。假如從内部快速 RAM執行,也許逭一黏也不箱要。 如果瑪琍歃晶片是在瑪琍歐擁有者模式使用於ROM, CPU22遊樂器程式甚至不從ROM讀任何事甚為重要。例如, 由於垂直熄滅,它引起一個NMI,然後CPU22自動地止企圖 從ROM抓取其中斷向量。逭是不期望的,因為CPU22已明顯 告訴瑪琍歐晶Η ,它將遠離ROM,並且發生一偏中斷,,然 後從ROM抓取。在此狀況下,從CPU22存取一値ROM,雖然 是在瑪琍歐擁有者棋式下,將使得瑪琍歃晶片假定這是一 鰌中斷向量要求。 於ROM瑪琍歐拥有者模式中下一偁中斷向量抓取期間, 瑪琍歃晶片將再配置中斷向量,進入超级NES内部工作 RAM32於堆叠地匾的底部。例如,假如平常中斷向置是$ 00:FFEC,然後它將産生一値跳躍到位置$00:〇l〇c。類似 地,從$00:ffex之所有中斷向量,將使得CPU22跳躍到$ 00:olox之相鼸位置。逭技術避免CPU22存取R0M10,當它 們不應如此時,並且使其轉到板上超级NES RAM32。須注 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項#填寫本页) 裝. 線. 本紙張尺度遑用中Η Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) 37 Λ 6 Η 6 五、發明説明(3 8) 意,RAM基中斷向量需包含跳躍或跳開到中斷管理器,亦 即,儲存著實際碼,而不只是向量位址。當瑪琍歐晶片不 在瑪琍歃擁有者模式時,使用正常ROM斷向量,最好指到 這些位置保持相同位址,當此RAM基中斷向量走到相同地 方時。 指今塞 瑪琍歃晶片指令集,提供一個有效方式,俾用於程式 化高速獪園與其它處理演算法。以下將簡短説明某些指令 ,並説明不同指令所使用的某些暫存器。亦包括指令集的 指令詳細列表。 指令是8位元指令,並且典型地在一艏時鐘信號遇期 執行。當,指令利用8位元前置指令修改。瑪琍歐晶片指 令集,包括一個獼特暫存器強制(override)条統,允許程 式者在任何指令前指定目地和來源暫存器。若設有這種" 強制"前置,指令將只在叠積器上操作。因此,指令集傜 可變長度指令集,並且具有無數倨組合。有某些基本指令 是一艏位元組長,能在一個週期中執行。利用提供前置指 令,一艏程式者能延伸指令的功能。一個指令可以是8, 16或24位元,依程式者的意願而定。 瑪琍歐處理器使用指令起始高速度、在板上快速RAM 程式執行,和延遲/緩衝I/O到記億體。經單一週期像素畫 圖指令的使用,能有效率地繪圖處理,此指令所引起始操 作使用上述像素畫圖硬體。 在雜別瑪琍歐指令集之前,執行指令時,處理器設定 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項#填寫木页) 裝· 訂. 線- 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度逍用中Η B家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公;¢) 38 A 6 Η 6 4⑽_ 五、發明説明$ 9 ) 或存取各種不同記億醱映至暫存器。如下說明。首先.識別 和 器 存 暫 元 : 位述 16所 個下 一 如 是 , 器標 存旗 留 暫之元 保 態元位 狀位16 016器 器器存擦 I 存存暫旗 暫暫標 傾旗 標每態 旗於狀元 〇 態闋 位 狀相L (please read the notes beforehand # 塡 write this page) Update the signal RFSH. The Emirates Euclidean chip completes an operation, which transmits an interrupt signal IRQ on the interrupt request line, as it is related to the super HES CPU. In addition, the CPU 22 generates read and write signals. From the timing channel circuit 21 in the control board 20, general timing signals are generated. A power-on / reset signal is also generated in the main control board 20, and the pot is coupled to the playing instrument cassette. Super HES also includes a confirmation processing device 25, which pseudo-exchanges the data at input I and output 0. And according to the above-mentioned US Patent 4,799,635, the R wire and a confirmation processing device 3 are reset on the television game instrument. In the processing device 25 shown in U.S. Patent 4,799,635, the CPU 22 is kept in a reset state until confirmation is established. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Precision Industry, A Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives, the block diagram of the Super HES TV game shown in Figure 2 has been described here in general. Further details about the Super NES include PPU24, which can be found in US Application No. 07 / 651,265, whose name is' " Image Processing Device ", and its application date is April 10, 1991. This application is here for reference. . How to transfer information between the Super NES and the game instrument cassette can be found in US Application No. 07 / 749,530, date of application on August 26, 1991. The name, the image processing system and the external storage device are used directly. E-body access device 〃, and the United States application No. 07/7 93,7 35, the application date on November 19, 1991, its name a embedded graphic display device and the use of external storage unit " here. These claims are here for reference. For some applications, the inventor has recognized that more information needs to be transmitted during the vertical extinction period than the main processing DMA circuit can actually transmit. Therefore, the 51 standard of this paper is used in a B family standard (CNS) T4 specification (210x297 male dragon) 18 81.  6. 丨 0,000 sheets (H) 21. 4588 Λ 6 Μ 6 Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Labor and Development, β-Work Consumer Cooperation Co., Ltd. V. Description of Invention {9) The extended vertical extinction time that may be expected. It may even cause the graphic size to be reduced slightly. With this method, the biggest advantages are the processing speed and the update rate of graphics. A perspective view of the example mechanical design of Yuan 3 Jie, a play instrument cassette case 19, which is used to house a Malio chip and other cassette structures as shown in FIG. Similarly, the circle 3 is a perspective view of a slap example housing used in a TV game console 20, and the hardware of the super HES TV game shown in Figure 2. For the mechanical design of this TV game instrument control board 20 and the corresponding movable game instrument cassette 19, please refer to US Application No. 07/748, 938, application date August 2, 1991, name, TV games ", this application is here for reference. FIGS. 4A and 4B are block diagrams of the Maliou crystal H2 as shown in FIG. 1. First, focus on the various busbars in Figures 4A and 4B. Command bus IHSTI? An 8-bit bus, which matches the command code to a variety of different modules. The X, Y, and Z buses are 16-bit data buses. The ΗΑ bus is a 24-bit main address bus. In the current best embodiment, it is used to address the super NES address bus. The HD bus is an 8-bit main bus, which is used to integrate into the Super NES data bus. The PC bus is a healthy 16-bit bus, which integrates the output of the Mateo chip programming counter (for example, in the general register block 76 register R15), to a variety of different components. The ROMA bus is a 20-bit ROM address bus. The ROM D bus is an 8-bit ROM data bus j. The RAM A bus is a biased RAM address bus. The RAMD-IN bus is an 8-bit RAM bus data bus. And RAMD-0UT is one (please read the notes beforehand Sun Kan writes this page) Installation-line-this paper 51 scale happy use a B home standard (CNS) 4 specifications (210x297; ¢) 19 81. 6.  10,000 »(II) Λ 6 Π 6 3i4588 V. Description of invention 6 〇) 8-bit RAM write data bus. / Ma Liuhe chip and Super NES share cassette RAM6,8, this RAM is used as the main mechanism for transmitting data between Ma Liuhe and Super NES. Super HES accesses the Maruio chip via the address and data bus HA and HD. The Maliou chip register 76 is accessed via the Super HES via the Super NES address bus HAA. Super HES accesses the chip program R0M10 and RAM6, 8 via the Maliou chip 2. The ROM controller 104 and the RAM controller 88 receive the memory access signal generated by the Super NES, and start the individual ROM and RAM memory access. Illustrated by the embodiment, the Maruchip 2 uses a RAM selection signal RAMCS to verify that the Super NES is currently addressing this RAM. The X, Y, and Z busbars shown in swollen 4A and 4B, and the internal Maruchip data bus. The X and Y busbars are source data busbars, and the Z data busbars are straightforward busbars. These buses carry 16-bit parallel data. When executing the command, the Maliou chip 2 puts the source of the data of one command on the X and / or Y bus, and puts the destination data on the Z bus. For example, when executing a command, add the contents of the two-shovel scratchpad and put the result in the third scratchpad. The arithmetic and logic unit (AUU50, receives the contents of the two source registers via the X and Y buses. And the result is merged into the Z bus (secondly supplied to a value-in-waiting register in block 76). Using the instruction decoding circuit 60 on the Maruio chip 2, the control signal obtained from the decoding of an instruction opcode is fused to the ALU50 to start an ADD operation. From the explanation of the circle 1, the Maruio crystal H pot Combined to Yihuo R〇H Exchange (please read the notes on the back of this page for the first time Sun Zengyan) Installation and line A 4 specifications (210x297 g; «:) 20 81.  6. 】 0,000 sheets ⑻ A 6 B 6 S145B8 Fifth, invention description fel) (please read the precautions first * write a wooden page) bus, a RAM bus, and a super NES main bus, all can be parallel Communication. Supervised by Malijun Chip 2, controlled by the main Super NES bus transmission, address and data multiples • to determine which tilt operation the main system is performing. The cassette ROM bus and cassette RAM bus are accessed in parallel, depending on the Super NES operation in progress at any known time. In the traditional Super NES TV game instrument cartridge, the main CPU address and data line are linearly coupled to RAM and ROM. Therefore, RAM and ROM cannot be accessed in parallel. According to an aspect of the present invention, the Marachip 2 is as shown in Figure 1, and separates the ROM bus and the RAM bus from the Super NES bus. The Maliou Chip 2 supervises the signals transmitted on the Super HES bus. And it is decided which signal needs to be networked to the ROM chip and RAM chip, and the ROM and RAM bus are separated after the second event, because this bus is not time-separated. Using separate ROM and RAM busses, the CF chip 2 can simultaneously write from ROM to RAM. In this way, Maruio crystal H can be effectively used for straight ROM chips, so the access time of the chip is significantly slower than the RAM access time, and there is no need to wait for the completion of RAM access before storing the RAM. Printed by A-Consumer Cooperative Society, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Economic Affairs. In Figure 4A, as mentioned above, the Maliou chip 2 is fully programmable and includes an ALU50. All arithmetic functions performed by ALU50 are within the Ma Jingjing wafer, except that the multiplication is performed by operating multiplier 64, and the circle-shaped hard mannequin is used to process certain pixel circle-shaped operations. Receiving an appropriate control signal from the instruction decoder 60, the ALU 50 performs addition, subtraction, mutual exclusion, shift, and other operations. As shown in Figure 4A, the ALU50 receives information about the operation from the X and Y bus. At the beginning of this operation, it uses a control signal received from the command decoder. And the result of the meshing operation goes to the z bus. The size of the paper is used in the national standard (CNS) T4 specification (210x297 male dragon) 81.  6.  10,000 sheets (Π) 2 1% Λ 6 It 6 Printed by GX Industrial and Consumer Cooperation of the Central Bureau of Economic Development of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention) Figure 6 will further illustrate A LU. In addition, the Maliou chip 2 includes special-purpose hardware to enable 3-D special effects and other drawing group operations to be effectively performed, so Xiaoshiyou musical instruments that use these functions can be actually built. Mali's chip 2 includes hard picture 52, which helps to convert the address from the pixel block in real time, and converts the characters used by the Super NES to the address. The advantage is that writing a program on the Maruio chip can use the commands Χ, Υ purlin to define the position of each pixel on the display screen. Therefore, performing the plaque operation is based on the pixels specified by a euro programmer, and the diurnal hardware 52 can immediately convert the specified pixels into character data in an appropriate format. Then, the character data is mapped to the desired location and used for display on the Super NES image 30, as shown in Group 2. In this way, Maru Oujing H programmers only use the super HES video RAM30 as a single bit, but in fact it is a character. The hard skull 52 responds to various commands related to different painting groups to allow the programmable selection of the X and Υ coordinates on the display screen, as well as the predetermined color for a specific pixel, and the pixels that are drawn to each other, so , Χ and Υ coordinate conversion is simplified to an address defined by a character, the form of this element definition is used to drive the super HES image RAM30. Painted Hard Brew 52 has a phase gate data gate, which allows pixel data to be buffered before writing to the cassette RAM to minimize RAM data changes. After the X and Y block data are converted and buffered in the hard drawing 52, the character definition data is sent to the cassette RAM. The map hardware is installed by tilting the PL0TX register 56 and PL0TY register 58 (please read back and take care first ^ Sun fills in the wooden page).  Line-This paper uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Grade 4 (210x297 mm) 22 81.  6.  10,000¾ (II) Λ 6 116 V. Description of invention $ 3) Don't receive X, Υ coordinate data. In the presently preferred embodiment, the PL0TX and PLOTY registers are not separate registers (as shown in 麧 4A), but the general register of the Manet sigh chip (that is, as shown in 銸 4B, in the register The registers R1 and R2 in block 76). The drawing hard sickle 52 also receives pixel color information via a partial color register 54. As explained below, the color of each pixel is stored in a matrix of 8X8 registers, in which each lanthanum pixel color specification occupies one column of matrix. The painting country hard man 52 handles the address and data of Yuyuan related to X and Y and the color input to the character RAM6,8. The character address is forwarded to the RAM controller 88 via the output line 53 and to a RAM address bus RAMA. Yuyuan data goes through round 55, multiplexer 93 and RAM data bus RA (D-out, to character RAM. Drawing hard waist 52 allows dysprosium to be addressed to pixels within the character, so the programmer provides one Partial " virtual " bit mapping to the display system. When keeping compatible with the super HES Yuyuan format., And virtual " bit mapping to remain in the cassette RAM Sent to Super NES Video RAM30, you use, for example, an eDMA® way in the above application No. 07/7 49,530. The prestige hard pus 52 allows individual pixel control of the speed of departure • Therefore some 3-D drawing effects include rotation The size and size changes become practical. Because the pixels are converted into character format, the painting garden hard smoke 52 is also received from a cassette RAM6, 8 via the RAMD-in data latch 82 and the input line 83 to receive the current pixel Information of other pixels in Zhoupu of X and Y. Using the previous pixel data taken from RAM6 and 8, and temporarily stored in the RAM data gate, the number of writes to RAM is the smallest. As shown in Figure 4A, the RAM data gate R80, 84 and 86, the relative color data received by Yi Di Cheng Chong; this image (Please read the notes on the back of this page to write this page by Sun Nan). _ Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Migong Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd., and used in the middle of the family. Standard (CNS) Ή specifications (2 丨 0x297 ; ¢) 23 81.  6. 】 0,000 sheets (II) Λ 6 Β 6, '4538 ;; i ·-V. Invention briefing 4) Multi-bit planes that have been stored in the cassette RAM, to provide the hard-copy 52 data / RAM The data latch 80 network is connected to the Super NES bus, so Super HES can read the content of the data latch. The RAM data latches 80, 82, 84 and 86 are controlled by the RAM controller 88. RAM data latches 84 and 86 operate from RAM6. 8 Receive the data, and combine the data from RAM6,8 to the destination Z bus, use a slap loaded into the register box 76 to pre-determine the register. In addition, the controller 88 is a latch 90, like a buffer RAM address. The address stored in the latch 90, like the RAM controller 88 via the RAM A bus, is used to address RAM6. 8. The RAM controller can also use the Super NES to access through the address bus HA. The plaque is hard. 5 2 It also responds to a READPIXEL command. Like reading this pixel color information, the content of the register R1 is used to define a horizontal position, and The content of the register R2 defines a value vertical position, and the result is placed in a value register of the register block 76 via the destination Z bus and the output line 87 in the register block 76. The PLOT hardware 52 will be described in further detail with FIGS. 7, 8A and 8B. The parallel pipeline buffer register 62 and an ALU controller instruction decoder 62 are coupled to the instruction bus INSTR, and operate to generate a control signal 〇CTL (using the output of this chip), the flap should be placed in Commands on the command bus start the operation. The Maruio chip 2 is like a parallel pipeline evacuation processor. When it is executing the current command, it grabs the command to be executed at the next tilt. The parallel pipeline register 2 stores the next instruction to be executed, and therefore, if possible, allows execution of the instruction during the encounter period. Commands placed on the command bus, use the program counter stored in a dump register 24 (please read the notes before filling in this page) install _ line Consumer cooperation du printed the paper standard Xiao B used in the national B standard (CNS) T4 specification (210X297 public; «:) 81 _ 6.  10,000 photos (II) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 to 8 Λ 6 __ [i_6_ V. Invention description 5)) Addressable content, this register is shown in the register block shown in Figure 4B, for example The register R15〇 in 76 uses the Maru Ou chip 2 to execute instructions, perhaps obtained from the program R0M10 shown in Figure 1, or Maru Ou internal fast RAM94, or from the cassette RAM6. 8. If the execution program is taken out of R0H10, the ROM controller 104 (as shown in FIG. 4B) will grab the instruction and place it on the Marshall chip instruction bus INSTR. If the program instruction is stored in the fast RAM 94, this instruction is directly output from the fast RAM 94 via the fast RAM output bus 95 and placed on the command bus. The main CPU, that is, the Super NES, is the part of the program R0M10 that is planned to be configured and used in the program instructions of the Ma Li Jing Jing H. The super HES program instructs the Ma Yanxi chip to perform a predetermined function, and provides the address of Ma Yuoujing Η at R0M10, using the code to access the Ma Yanxi Η. The parallel pipeline register 62, which fetches the instruction before a slap of the instruction is executed, provides the instruction phase information of the instruction decoder 60, so that the decoder can predict what will happen during the execution of the program, so it is allowed to look forward To deal with it. The block 60 decodes and controls the control circuit to generate control signals for instructing the ALU 50, the picture hardware 52, the fast control 68, etc., to perform the operation indicated by the execution instruction. The Maruchip also includes a tilt high-speed parallel multiplier 64, which is separated from the ALU50. In response to the predetermined command, the multiplier 64 operates to multiply the number of 2-tilt 8-bits received from the X and Y buss, and loads the 16-bit result to the destination Z bus. If it is possible to perform this multiplication calculation within an encounter period. The number of rounds up to the multiplier 64 may have a sign or no sign (please read the back-to-back notes # 塡 写 this page) This paper standard is used in a 81 home standard (CNS) Τ4 specification (210x297 : «:) 25 81.  6.  10,000 copies (II) 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economics, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention). The multiplier can also perform long multiplication lotus calculations, in which the 16-bit number of two dysprosiums is multiplied to produce a 32-bit result. The multiplier 64 also includes a phase-part partial multiplication register 66, which stores part of the multiplication plot during multiplication. The slave command decoder 60 uses a β control signal to enable the multiplier 64 when decoding to a tilt multiplication method. Multiplier 64 will execute a 16-bit multiply long multiply instruction.  Enforcement within the minimum 4 times of the dysprosium. The format of the long multiplication instruction: R4 (lower word group), DREG (higher word group " Sreg ^ Re. Execute this instruction, like using the content of register R6 to multiply the source register, and store a Yu 32 The bit result is in the register R4 / DREG (lower / higher). The multiplication has a sign, then set the zero and signal flag on the 32-bit result. Perform the lotus calculation according to the following 6 tilt steps: Step 1 : Multiply R4 [0… 15] = SREG [0… 7] SR6 [0 ... 7] without sign. Step 2: X has 〆sign 〇R4 [.... 15] = R4 [0… 15] +2 56 * SREG [8… 15] * R6 [0… 7]. Ignore the higher 8 bits of the product, but retain from the carry of addition. Step 3: X has a sign. R5 [0… 15] = CY + U6 [8… 15] s SREG [0… + 256; sign extension. Step «4: X has no sign. Y has positive and negative signs. R4 [0… 15] = R4 [0… 15] + 256 * SREG [0 ... 7] * R6 [8 ... 15]. Ignore the more distant 8 bits of the multiplying Zhen, but retain the carry from the addition. Step »5: Y has a sign. R5 [0… 15] = R5 [0… 15] + CY + SREG [0… 7] * R6 [8… 15]) + 256; sign extension. Step »6: X. Y has a sign. R5 [0… 15] = R5 [0… 15] + RY [8… 15] * R6 [8- 15] 〇 (please read the precautions beforehand Sun Ye Qiaomu page) The paper size is not in use Η Family B (CNS) f 4 specifications (210x297 male dragon) 26 81.  6.  ] 0,000 sheets (H) 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperation Department of the Central Bureau of Standardization of the Ministry of Education V. Description of the invention) The multiplier 64 used in this embodiment has, among others, digital computer arithmetic Instructions. With reference to circle 4B, the fast controller 48 (shown in further detail in circle 14), allowing a program owner to effectively start loading into the fast RAM 94 for some programs that are expected to execute at high speed. This type of, fast # is typically used to execute a small program Xunchen, like often happens when the picture is processed. The Maliou chip instruction set includes a '" CAWE々 instruction. Any command CM after the CACHE command is carried to the fast RAM until the fast RAM is full. When the CACHE instruction is executed, the current program counter state is loaded into the fast base register 70. Therefore, the contents of the fast base register define the starting position where this fast will be started. Most instructions are executed in one cycle. From relatively low external memory, such as R0M10, or RAM6, 8 instructions, they are fetched before they are executed. This will take an extra 6 cycles. To increase the execution speed of the program, the fast RAM94 in the Malikin crystal itself should be used. The fast RAM94 can be used to quickly record 100 million bytes for a 512-byte instruction. Compared to the average program size, the former is relatively small. Therefore, programmers must decide how to properly use Quicknote 94. Any program Xunchen can quickly record the size of the memory in 512 bytes, and it can be executed at full speed, that is, the capture and execution are in the same period. Because of the separate bus, when executing the code of internal fast memory 94, both ROM and RAM can be accessed at the same time. The fast RAM94 should be used to rotate a sprite $ (Sprite), using a Xunchen executed in the fast memory 94. When it performs rotation and large size (please read the precautions before filling in the wooden page), this paper uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) T4 specifications (210X297) *. 81.  6.  10,000 sheets (II) 27 Λ 6 B 6 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of invention? 8) When calculating small changes, the color of each pixel will be read from R0M10. It uses the PLOT instruction (described below) to write pixels to RAM6, 8. All happens in parallel, the slowest operation will make it slow down quickly. The slowest operation is often the ROM data capture, which is the designed Maliu chip, which uses buffer access in ROM and RAM. When compared to the relatively slow execution of R0M10, the execution speed of a program in fast RAM94 is 6 times faster. But first it must be loaded from the ROM into the flash memory 94. Performing this work is like starting with any Xun Chen who wants to receive a quick memory, and placing a command or two. Only the first 512 bytes of Xun Hun are retrieved from the address of the CACHE instruction and placed into a quick memory. When the first repeating code is executed, the program comes from R0M10 and is copied to the fast RAM in 16 bytes. All further iterations will be repeated from the fast RAM94, not the R0M10. The CACHE instruction is used in front of any repeated program loop. Only Xingjing's post-mine repeats benefit from the rapid record of billions of dollars. If the program loop is larger than 512 bytes and exceeds the fast memory 94, it will still work correctly. Only the first tooth 512 bytes is executed from the fast memory 94, but the rest is still executed from R0M10 . This may increase some speeds, but it is not ideal. In the preferred embodiment there is a fast sample bit register 72, like a part of the fast controller 68, which is used to identify the location of the memory that has been loaded into the fast RAM 94. The fast identification bit allows Maru Oujing H to quickly decide whether to obtain executable program instructions from the faster fast RAM, rather than from the program R0M10. Use the fast controller 68 or the super NES to converge via the super HES address (please read the backing notes # 塡 写 木 页) This paper is used in the 8B home sample standard (CNS) f4 specification (2) 0X297 male dragon ) 28 8K6.  10,000 sheets (10 214588 Λ 6 η 6 V. Description of the invention β 9) Row HA passes through the multiplexer 96 to access the fast RAM. The fast controller 68 is integrated into the program counter bus PC to load into the fast base register 70, and executes the check operation of the fast memory address exceeding the range. Similar to the parallel readout that can be done from R0M10, the Maruio chip also provides a way to write to RAM6, 8 in parallel. Whenever the Malioux register writes to RAM 6, 8, it will start, for example, to write the RAM to a separate RAM in the RAM controller 88 to perform the billion-element change. This typically takes 6 cycles, and when it does so, it will not delay the processor. If the programmer avoids another dysprosium RAM change at this time. For example, other processing is faster in interleaving intervals between each store instruction. Only in this way can the RAM write circuit have time to do its job. If the two writes are used in a row, when the first one is writing, the second tilt will extend the processor. For example (the instructions used from the instruction set will be described below) (please read the back and forth notes first # 蜞 写 木 页) The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Labor and Welfare printed the FROM R8; Store R8 to (R13) SH (R13) SM (R14) Store R0 to (R14) TO R1 FROM R2 ADD R3 execute: r 1 = r 2 + r 3 TO R4 FROM R5 ADD R6; execute: r 4 = r 5 + r 6 The size of the paper is based on the Zhongming S family standard (CNS) T4 specification (210X297 g) 29 81.  6.  10,000 sheets (11) Λ G η 6 214588 V. Description of invention (30) (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page) Note that the two-dump storage instructions are too close to each other. The second slap will require a period of 6 values because the RAM bus is busy trying to complete the first store command. A better way to write a program. If there are other useful codes separated between the two pseudo-save instructions, a faster execution speed can be achieved. For example: FROM R8; Store R8 to (R 13) SM (R1 3) TO R 1 FROM R2 ADD R3 f execute: r 1 = r 2 + r3 TO R4 FROM R5 ADD R6 execute r 4 = Γ 5 + r 6 SM (R 1 4) Execute R0 to (R 14) In this way, several more instructions are executed in parallel at the same time, the result of the instruction is written to RAM, and then the second storage instruction is executed after a few cycles. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The following instruction set, including a quick instruction, is used to write back a dump register to the last RAM address. This allows > large amounts of data processing, using the values loaded from RAH, to do some processing on it, and then quickly save it back. As shown in Fig. 4B, —Mei immediate data latch 74 meshes to the command bus. The data latch 74 allows the command to provide the source of the data itself, so this command does not require a command source register. Immediately report the round out of the latch 74 to the destination bus Z. Sequentially speaking, one of the registers 76 is predetermined. The paper is pre-determined. The paper size is 30. The Chinese standard (CNS) A 4 specification (210X297 gram) is used. 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Printed by the consumer cooperative V. Description of the invention (3 ^ register. The instruction decoding circuit 60 decodes a data command immediately, and initiates the appropriate operation to send to the register. As shown in FIG. 4B, GETB temporarily The memory 98 is used to connect the above display / slow read operation. In this regard, if a relatively low access time ROM is widely used, conventional microprocessors typically have to wait until a data capture is completed, regardless of when a ROM. Using the following delay / buffer capture mechanism, other operations can also be performed when the data capture is completed. According to this mechanism, if the register R14 in the register block 76 is accessed or modified in any way , Automatically start the ROM or RAM grab, and its address is identified by the content of R14. As shown in circle 4B, the scratchpad R14 is incorporated into the ROM control control 104. The scratchpad is modified in any way at any time R14 content, ROM controller 104 For initial ROM access. The result of accessing the ROM is loaded into the GET B register 98 via the multiplexer 102. It is coupled to the ROM data bus ROM D. The following command identification allows the access to be balanced at GET B The information of the register 98. This information is loaded into the destination bus Z through the multiplexer 100, and then enters a dump register at the register block 76. In this way, if the data fetched from the ROM, you It is known how many pre-determined processing cycles it needs. So it can be fetched without waiting and performing other operations. Mario chips can execute, for example, irrelevant codes, after such data fetching has started. The GET B register is also used to store the information retrieved from R0M6, 8 through the multiplexer 102, as shown in FIG. 4B. The register block 76 has a total of 16-bit 16-bit registers (R0 ~ R15). The registers R0 ~ R13 are general purpose registers (although some registers are used for special purposes, as explained below). As mentioned above, the register R14 is used as a standard for reading Chinese paper (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 official history) 3 1 (please read the precautions before writing this page) Line · 214588 Λ 6 η 6 Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Economic Development, Beigongxiaot Cooperative V. Description of Invention (3 2) The indicator of 100 million units, and, when modified, starting from ROM (or RAM) Reading period. The read bytes are stored in a temporary buffer plaque (GET B register 98), like later access using a dump GET L or GET Η command. The register R 15 is the program number It refers to the beginning of the next instruction to be fetched. The register R0 is a general purpose register, which is typically used as an accumulator. For most single encounter period commands, it also presets the source and destination registers. If, for example, it is desired to add the contents of R0 and R4 together, it only needs to indicate the R 4 register. The Rll, R12 and R13 registers are used to execute a value loop instruction. The R13 register stores the top address where the loop will be executed, and the R12 register stores the number of times the loop will be executed. If the content of register R12 is non-zero, then the instruction at the address specified in the contents of R13 is loaded into the program counter (R15) and executed. After the completion of the loop, the returned address is stored in the register R 1 1. The register control logic 78 is coupled to the register block 76, and controls access to the general registers R0 to R15. According to the format of the held instruction to be executed, the instruction decoding logic 60 converts the instruction 1 or the multiple registers R0 to R15. Scratchpad Control logic 78 specifies scratchpads. These scratchpads will require the user to execute the next instruction. The register control logic 78 is suitable as the output of the register to the X and Y bus. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4B, the appropriate temporary registers R0 to R15 receive information from the Z bus under the control of the temporary register control 78. The ROM controller 104 receives the address from the super NES address bus ΗΑ, (please read the precautions on the back before writing this page). Binding · Order-line.  The size of this paper is printed in China National Standard (CNS) Grade 4 (210X297H) 32 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 9,14588_Lii V. Description of the invention (3 3) or the Maruio chip will access this bit site. The ROM controller 104 is described in detail in the next step as shown in FIG. 13%. The information accessed from R0M10 is loaded into the fast RAM 94 for fast instruction execution. The ROM and RAM controllers 104, 108 only have bus cutting units, which cut access attempts between the Super NES and Marie Oujing. As will be further explained below, the Maruio chip also uses a status register (ie, in the register block 76 or in RAM6, 8), which can be accessed using the Super NES CPU, and the storage flag is used for identification Status conditions, such as zero flag samples, carry flags, plus and minus flags, overflow flags, a G0 " flag sample (when 1 indicates that the Maru chip is in progress, and 0 indicates that the Maru chip is stopped); one Dump the ROM byte to grab the flag in progress (indicating that the scratchpad R14 has been accessed). A variety of different mode indicator flags, including a ACT1 flag and an ACT2 flag; the immediate low byte and the high byte flag of the residence; the source of the flag indication and the current register, which has been a > with 〃 ago Set instruction and an interrupt flag setting 1. The Maliou wafer represents a square circle in the form of 4A and 4B. It uses Super NES to turn on or turn off the Mali wafer multiple times in one second to perform work. At the beginning, when the Super NES is turned on, the game program stored in R0M10 starts. It should be noted that before using the Super NES and Maruio chip processor game program to execute, first check the game instrument cassette. As in the embodiment, this confirmation occurs like using the start to put the Super NES CPU in a reset state, and confirming that the processor executes a confirmation program that is related to the game cartridge and the Super NES main control board. This is based on the US Patent 4,799,635. (Please read the notes beforehand, Sun fills in the wooden page) The BB family standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 g *) in the ifc scale of this paper (210x297 g *) 33 A 6 η 6 o- ^ A ^ Bo_ V. Description of the invention ¢ 4) From the beginning, the image of the Maruyang wafer is in the closed state. At the end of the day, the / Super NES has unlimited access to the game instrument cassette program ROM and game instrument cassette RAM. When the Super NES needs to use the Maruio chip processing capability to perform graphics operations or mathematical calculations, the Super NES stores the appropriate data for the Maruio chip processing in the cassette RAM (or pre-determined Maruio register) ); And in the Malichao chip program counter, load the address where the Malyu program will be executed. The data is processed using Mario chips, which may be pre-determined X, Y coordinate data of the target. The target rotates and zooms in or out. Maru Ou Jing can execute programs that implement algorithms to manipulate the foreground and background of different numbers of moving targets. Use Malo chip speed to enhance the hardware and software to get this operation can be performed at a very high speed. The use of Maricao chips to process ghosts can greatly expand the overall capabilities of TV game systems. For example, the Super NES restricts the display of 128 ghosts per frame, but with the Mario chip, hundreds of ghost displays can be achieved, as well as rotation, for example. When the Maliou chip completes the functions required by the Super NES. Execute a STOP instruction. And an interrupt signal is generated, and it is input to the Super NES to instruct Maru Ou Jing H to complete its operation, and sequentially instruct it to prepare to perform the next dysprosium work. You can also use the Maruio chip to perform small tasks, such as a high-speed multiplying task, or use it to draw a full-screen ghost S. In this work, the super NES is freely processed in parallel with the Maruio chip. If the super NES is far away from the RAM or ROM bus, when the bus is used. If the Super NES gives the Maruio chip, control the RAM and ROM bus on the musical instrument cassette (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page). Install the-line.  The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, Beigong Consumer Co., Ltd. cooperated in the printing of this paper. The Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210x297 g; «) 34 Λ 6 η 6 V. Invention description g5) (Please read the back first And the precautions need to be filled in 3), then Super NES can execute its working RAM32 standard program, as shown in Figure 2. Therefore, the output of the whole German system is increased, and a slap Super NES program to be executed is copied into its work RAM by copying from the ROM. At the same time, a program is executed using Maru Ping Jing M. The flowchart shown in _5 represents the operation sequence of the main CPU (for example, Super NES CPU) to execute the I " execute Ma 琍 歃 # program, like used to start the Ma yu chip, grab from the required address of the ROM And execute the code. The routine represented in Figure 5 will typically be executed by the Super NES CPU. When the routine is copied from the program R0M1O to its work RAM32 as shown in circle 2, at any time, when asked to perform a bow operation At this time, the main CPU executes this routine. As shown in block 1 2 5, when executing w to execute the Maru " main C Ρ ϋ routine, the initial operation is performed, including saving the super NES register. During the initial step, the routine is copied from the program R0M10 to the main CPU work RAM32. As shown in block 127, the R0M10 code group stores the code to be executed and is loaded into a chip memory. In addition, the actual address in the code group is stored in the Maruio chip screen base register, as shown in block 129. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy. Thereafter, as shown in block 131, the I / O input / output wedge is set on the Maruio chip to identify whether the 4, 16, or 256 color mode is used. This mode is similar to the color wedge operation of the main CPU. In addition, the mode setting is used to define the height of the number of characters displayed on the screen. The mode bit system is set to control the ROM and RAM bus to the Maru chip. Separately, the control of ROM and RAM bus can be selected, so set the Mali Ou to a bow mode, that is, it accesses the ROM bus, the RAM bus uses the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specifications for the paper size. (210x297 公 35 Λ 6 Π 6-V. Description of the invention (36) (Please read the precautions before filling in the wooden ") or both. Therefore, if it is the setting of 〃 chess-type owner of Α 玛 琍 欧For ROM and RAM, the main CPU cannot read or write from or to the ROM or RAM. It should be noted that when the Maliou chip is using the program ROM bus, if the main CPU attempts to access the program ROM, there is a mechanism to make the matrix The Yeou chip returns the fake address to the Super NES. Jump to this address and keep the Super NES occupied until the Maru chip no longer accesses the cartridge ROM bus. As shown in block 133, The counter is loaded with a storage address, and after this address stores the first value instruction to be executed by the Machiou routine, the Machiou Jing H starts operating. Then, the main CPU waits for the slave Machiou chip (block 1 3 5 ) Comes a number interruption number. When the flute receives the one-tilt interruption signal, it informs the super NES Maru The chip has finished its operation and has stopped (block 137). If this interrupt signal is not received, the main CPU »waits for an interrupt (block 135). The Super NES may be in parallel with the Malmio chip during this time Executing the code, using the RAM32 fan circle to execute it, as shown in Figure 2. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy Box 76) to determine whether the Maruio chip " GO 〃 flag has been set, this flag indicates that the Maruio chip is in operation (137). In addition, the Maruio chip H status register setting A dysprosium interrupt flag is used to indicate the interrupt signal received by the main CPU. The Maruio chip is the source of the interrupt signal. Therefore, after the main CPUU35) receives a bow interrupt signal, test the appropriate Maruio state temporary storage To determine whether the Malyu chip is the source of interruption (relative to, for example, an interrupt signal for a vertical extinction interval). If the Maruio chip has been stopped (137), then the ROM and RAM Maruio owner mode bits are used in this paper standard to use the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 gong) 36 Λ 6 η 6 Economy Printed by the Ministry of Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative V. Invention Instructions (3 7) Eliminated. And Super HES has full access to ROM and RAM. Super HES leaves the routine (141) and returns to the place where its program entered before the execution of the Mahalo routine. Ο When the CPU22 game instrument program converted the Malyu chip to the wedge of the ROM Malyu owner. It must stop accessing the ROM voluntarily. Whenever the CPU 22 needs to access the ROM for the same reason, it can only open and close the ROM Ma Jingou owner mode. The Malio chip will automatically stop when it needs to access this R0H next time until it returns to the ROM Malio owner mode. If it is executed from the internal fast RAM, it may not be necessary to stick to it. If the Maru chip is used in ROM in Maru Owner mode, it is very important that the CPU22 game instrument program does not even read anything from the ROM. For example, since it is extinguished vertically, it causes an NMI, and then the CPU 22 automatically stops attempts to fetch its interrupt vector from the ROM. It is undesirable, because CPU22 has clearly told Maru Oujing that it will stay away from the ROM, and a partial interruption has occurred, and then fetched from the ROM. In this situation, accessing a value ROM from the CPU 22, although in the Martial Owner's chess style, will allow the Maru chip to assume that this is an interrupt vector requirement. During the next capture of the interrupt vector in the ROM Marie Owner mode, the Marie chip will reconfigure the interrupt vector and enter the Super NES internal working RAM32 at the bottom of the stacked plaque. For example, if the normal interrupt direction is $ 00: FFEC, then it will generate a value jump to the position $ 00: 〇l〇c. Similarly, all interrupt vectors from $ 00: ffex will cause the CPU 22 to jump to the phase of $ 00: olox. The technology prevents the CPU22 from accessing the R0M10 when they should not, and transfers it to the onboard Super NES RAM32. Note (please read the notes on the back # fill in this page) to install.  line.  This paper uses the Chinese Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 male dragon) 37 Λ 6 Η 6 5. Invention Description (3 8) Meaning, the RAM-based interrupt vector needs to include a jump or jump to the interrupt manager , That is, the actual code is stored, not just the vector address. When the Malyu chip is not in the Malyu owner mode, the normal ROM interrupt vector is used. It is best to refer to these locations to maintain the same address when the RAM-based interrupt vector goes to the same location. Refers to the Samaru chip instruction set, which provides an effective way to program high-speed zuanyuan and other processing algorithms. The following is a brief description of some instructions, and some registers used by different instructions. A detailed list of instructions in the instruction set is also included. The instruction is an 8-bit instruction, and is typically executed at the head clock signal. When, the instruction is modified by an 8-bit preamble. The Maruio chip instruction set includes a Temporary register override rule that allows programmers to specify destination and source registers before any instruction. If this "forced" prefix is provided, the instruction will only operate on the stacker. Therefore, the instruction set is variable-length instruction set and has countless combinations. There are certain basic instructions that are a head byte, which can be executed in one cycle. By providing pre-commands, a programmer can extend the functions of the commands. A command can be 8, 16, or 24 bits, depending on the programmer's wishes. The Malio processor uses instruction to start high speed, fast on-board RAM program execution, and delay / buffer I / O to memory. Through the use of a single-cycle pixel drawing instruction, the drawing process can be efficiently performed. The initial operation introduced by this instruction uses the above-mentioned pixel drawing hardware. Before the Zabeimaliu instruction set, when executing the instructions, the processor settings (please read the precautions on the back #fill in the wooden page) to install and order.  Line-Printed on the paper standard Xiaobei Standard (CNS) Grade 4 (210X297); ¢ 38 A 6 Η 6 4⑽_ V. Description of Invention $ 9) or deposit Take a variety of different records to the scratchpad. As explained below. First of all. Identify and store temporary: The next bit of the 16th bit is the same, the device retains the temporary state of the state. 16 016 The device stores and erases I. Stores the temporary flag and temporarily tilts the flag every state Flag state

Z 2Z 2

C 3C 3

SS

VV

旗旗標到 樣標號旗15 旗位負位R[ 零進正溢XO 標標 進 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木页) 5 樣 旗 ο 中 ] 行 15執 入 片 進 晶 14歐 元])荆止 位位瑪停 裝- 6 Γ 取 抓 組 元 位 Η ο R 行 ,si 進 在 正 線. 7 留 保 為 定 設 被 態 狀 琍 1 班 示 指 以 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 停NI 片级 晶超 瞅到 琍合 瑪鎘 示號 指信 態此 狀 , 生 産 的 號 信 元i斷 位^中 0 旗執 " 在 Go正 %*片 晶 , 歐止 ♦ ο VV 値 1 且 並 其 起 前 令 這 目指 0 示組取 指元抓 50 位料 元ET資 位5G成 帛5完 設Μ Bϋρτφ 旗$D以 這 。* 取 S ^ ^ 檢ΐ清 S ^ ^ ¾ 理 旗 ί 立方 處Mi此 ESRO到 ⑨一, 超 一了 -7 用彳彳 j 進執 丨在能 )o正不 存 暫 態 狀 些 出 讀 地 0 單 位 高 較 的 器 元合 位 a wo 組 tm 高 β 用 較 利 的 器II元 主 或 m·*· 理 處 Η 晶 歐 琍 班 用 利 以 可 存 暫 標 旗 態 狀 定 設 0 元 位 8 餘 其 式 模 同 不 義 定 與 令 指 置 前 定 決 先 預 本紙張尺度边用中國Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公釐) 39 04⑽ 經濟部中央櫺準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明) 的指令编譯。 位元 棋 式 8 a 1 11 變 換 (ADD -> A D C , S II B - > S B C 等) 9 a 1 t 2 變 換 (ADD ->ADD# , SUB- >SUB#等) 10 i 1 立 邸 位 元 組低 (在 i h之 前做) 11 i h 立 m 位 元 组高 (低 位元 组缓衡直到 hi 準 儎 ) 12 b SR e g & DR e g 二 者設定, 利用W I T Η設 定 Ο 13 - 保 留 14 - 保 留 15 ί r g 中 斷 旗 標 在如上所識別ACT1模式中,一個ADD指令將被编譯成 一艏ADD具有進位。並且一個SUBTRACT指令將编譯成 SUBTRACT具有進位。一鹤指令ACT1起始該楔式。 一偁ACT2指令修改ADD指令的编譯,成為ADD具有立即 資料,並修改SUBTRACT成為SUBTRACT具有立©資料。逭* 立即"資料在指令後立即位元組。須注意,指令ACT3將設 定位元8和9成為邏輯、' 的準位。位元1〇和11之設定 依是否此立即資料為立即髙位元组或立即低位元組而定。 狀態暫存器的位元12定義一個w 6〃模式,其中利用一個 前置指令、、WITH 〃,以設定來源和目地暫存器。狀態暫 存器的位元15健存瑪琍歐中斷信號,其在瑪琍歐停止執行 後被設定。 本紙張尺度遑用中國國家樣準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公*) 40 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再蜞、巧木") Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明) 瑪琍歐晶片包括許多暫存器,除上述狀態暫存器.。如 上所述,瑪琍歐晶片包括16個16位元寬之暫存器,如圖 4A與4B在暫存器方塊76所說明的。大部份這些暫存器係一 般目地暫存器,並且能於資料或位址儲存。但,暫存器R15 都是一直使用成程式計數器。典型地,暫存器有二個目的 ,使用於和主CPU通信,以及使用於控制程式的執行。此 外,在瑪琍歃晶片所使用的其它暫存器,其功能如下表所 述。 暫存器 特別功能 rO 預設 DReg 與 SReg r 1 PLOT指令的X座標 r2 PLOT指令的Υ座標 r 3 無 r4 低位元組的LMULT指令結果 r 5 無 r6 宇組乘法使用於FRM0LT與LM0LT指令 r7 使用於MEREG指令之來源1 r8 使用於MERGE指令來源2 r 9 無 r 1 0 無 rll 使用於副常式呼叫之連接暫存器 r 1 2 LOOP指令的計數 r 1 3 LOOP指令跳躍的位址 r 14 ROM位址,當修正從ROM讀出的一傾 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木页) 裝- •^_ 線· 本紙張尺度逍用中ffl 9家樣準(CNS) f 4規格(210X297公龙) 41 A 6 η 6Flag flag to sample label flag 15 Flag bit negative R [Zero into positive overflow XO standard into (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page) 5 sample flag ο]] Line 15 into the chip into the crystal 14 euro ]) Jing Zhiweiwei stop installation-6 Γ take the group position Η ο R line, si advance in the main line. 7 Retention is set for the status of the state. 1 class instruction refers to the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The printing of NI chip-level crystal super eye to Yehema cadmium indicates that the signal is in this state, and the number of cells produced is broken ^ in 0 flags " in Go positive% * flake crystal, European stop ♦ VV Value 1 and its predecessor, this command means that 0 indicates that the group fetches the index, grabs the 50-bit data element, and the ET level is 5G into the silk 5. The Μ Bϋρτφ flag $ D is set here. * Take S ^ ^ Check l Clear S ^ ^ ¾ Liqi cubic Mi Mi ESRO to ⑨ one, super one over -7 use 彳 彳 j to carry out 丨 in the ability) o are not stored transient state 0 Units with higher unit aw unit a wo group tm higher β Use a better unit II element master or m · * · Handle Η Crystal Ou Liban use the tentative flag state to set 0 unit position 8 Yu Qi's style is undefined and the order is determined before the decision. The paper size is used in front of the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm) 39 04⑽ Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Development of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. System V. Instruction compilation). Bit chess 8 a 1 11 transformation (ADD-> ADC, S II B-& SBC, etc.) 9 a 1 t 2 transformation (ADD-> ADD #, SUB- > SUB #, etc.) 10 i 1 Lidi bit low (before ih) 11 ih Lim bit high (low byte is balanced until hi quasi) 12 b SR eg & DR eg Both settings, use WIT Η setting Ο 13-Reserved 14 -Retain the 15 rg interrupt flag in the ACT1 mode identified above, an ADD instruction will be compiled into a bow ADD with carry. And a SUBTRACT instruction will be compiled into SUBTRACT with carry. A crane command ACT1 starts the wedge. The ACT2 instruction modifies the compilation of the ADD instruction to become ADD with immediate data, and modify SUBTRACT to become SUBTRACT with immediate data. ** immediately " the data is in bytes immediately after the command. It should be noted that the instruction ACT3 will set the positioning elements 8 and 9 to a logical level. The setting of bits 10 and 11 depends on whether the immediate data is immediate high byte or immediate low byte. Bit 12 of the status register defines a w 6〃 mode, in which a pre-command, WITH 〃 is used to set the source and destination registers. Bit 15 of the status register stores the Mario interrupt signal, which is set after Mario stops execution. This paper uses the Chinese National Standards (CNS) Grade 4 (210X297 g *) 40 (please read the precautions before reading, Qiaomu ") Λ 6 Η 6 Beicong Consumption, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative. 5. Description of the invention) The Malio chip includes many registers, except for the above-mentioned status registers. As mentioned above, the Maruio chip includes 16 16-bit wide registers, as illustrated in register block 76 of FIGS. 4A and 4B. Most of these registers are general purpose registers and can be stored in data or addresses. However, register R15 is always used as a program counter. Typically, the register has two purposes, used to communicate with the main CPU, and used to control the execution of programs. In addition, the functions of the other registers used in the Maruchip are described in the following table. Special register function rO Preset DReg and SReg r 1 X coordinate of PLOT instruction r 2 Y coordinate of PLOT instruction r 3 None r4 LMULT instruction result of low byte r 5 None r6 Yu group multiplication is used in FRM0LT and LM0LT instruction r7 Used in the source of the MEREG instruction 1 r8 Used in the source of the MERGE instruction 2 r 9 No r 1 0 No rll Used in the connection register of the subroutine call r 1 2 The count of the LOOP instruction r 1 3 The address of the LOOP instruction jump r 14 ROM address, when correcting the readout from the ROM (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page) Install-• ^ _ Line (210X297 male dragon) 41 A 6 η 6

21.45BB21.45BB

五、發明説明4 2 ) r 1 5 其它暫存器 8 位元PCBAK 8 位元 R0MBAK 8 位元RAMBAK 16位元SCB 8位元ΟΡ 8位元SCS (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再填寫木頁) 起始位元組 程式計數器 程式碼組暫存器 程式資料ROM組暫存器,64Κ組 程式資料ROM組暫存器,641(組 銀幕畫面基底 位元平面的碼號 銀幕畫面列大小選擇: 256,320,512,1024,1280 (銀幕畫面16 & 20宇元高,在2,4 & 8位元平面) 瑪琍歐晶片亦包括一個色彩棋式CM0DE暫存器。在這 暫存器的4個位元,像用於本實施例中,創造如下所述特 殊效應。利用設定一個CM0DE暫存器位元變化,創造該等 效應,傜基於是否設定16或2 5 6色彩解析度模式,其例如 下説明之。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 以下是CM0DE暫存器位元 C MODE 位元 畫圖色彩0位元(NOT透明性位元) 於16色彩模式: 假如位元0 = 1,並且所選擇色彩半位元組=0,則不畫 raw m 〇 於256色彩模式和位元3 = 0: 42 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) Λ 6 Η 6 214588 五、發明説明43 ) 假如位元0 = 1,並且色彩位元組=0,則不畫園。. 於258色彩模式和位元3 = 1: 假如位元0 = 1,並且色彩低半位元組=0,則不畫圖。 Ν.Β.透通 0Ν=0 透通0FF=1 只有使用透明性OFF,利用0充滿一鴒地匾(使用於淸 除銀幕畫面) CM0DE位元1 抖動位元 抖動在16色彩模式。(高/低半位元組給2倕色彩) 假如(xpos XOR ypos AND 1)=0,則選擇低半位元組 假如(xpos XOR AND 1)=1,則選擇高半位元組。 假如透明性是開,並且所選擇色彩半位元組是零,則 不畫圖。 於258色彩模式,抖動無效應。 CM0DE位元2 高半位元色彩位元 於16色彩模式或256色彩模式,並且CM0DE位元3設定 〇 當此位元設定,COLOUR命令設定色彩暫存器的低半位 元組,至來源位元組的高半位元組。(使用未緊縮16色彩 儲存幽靈,當高半位元組為另一個幽靈)。 假如色彩暫存器的低半位元組是零,則不畫面,且透 明性打開。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫木页) 裝- 線- 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度逍用中Η Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) 43 A 6 B 6 214588 五、發明説明) CMODE位元3 複雜位元 只有256色彩模式。當設定此位元,則鎖定色彩的高 半位元组。並且COLOR命令只改變低半位元組。只從低半 位元組計算其透明性。 於正常256色彩模式,假如是開,則從所有位元計算 透明性。 ;16色彩模式例子5. Description of the invention 4 2) r 1 5 Other registers 8-bit PCBAK 8-bit R0MBAK 8-bit RAMBAK 16-bit SCB 8-bit ΟΡ 8-bit SCS (please read the precautions before filling in the wooden Page) Start byte program counter program code group register program data ROM group register, 64K group program data ROM group register, 641 (group screen screen base bit plane code number screen screen row size selection : 256, 320, 512, 1024, 1280 (screen 16 & 20 U element high, in 2, 4 & 8 bit plane) The Malio chip also includes a color chess CM0DE register. In this register 4 One bit, as used in this embodiment, creates special effects as described below. By setting a bit change in a CM0DE register, these effects are created, based on whether 16 or 2 5 6 color resolution mode is set. For example, the following description: Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economics. The following is the CM0DE register bit C MODE bit drawing color 0 bit (NOT transparency bit) in the 16 color mode: if bit 0 = 1, and the selected color nibble = 0, then do not draw raw m 〇 256 color mode and bit 3 = 0: 42 This paper standard uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 male dragon) Λ 6 Η 6 214588 V. Description of invention 43) If bit 0 = 1 , And the color byte = 0, the garden is not drawn. . In 258 color mode and bit 3 = 1: If bit 0 = 1, and the lower nibble of color = 0, no picture is drawn. Ν.Β. Transparent 0Ν = 0 Transparent 0FF = 1 Only use transparency OFF, fill a plaque with 0 (used to remove screen) CM0DE bit 1 Dithering bit Dithering in 16 color mode. (High / low nibble gives 2 colors) If (xpos XOR ypos AND 1) = 0, then select low nibble If (xpos XOR AND 1) = 1, select high nibble. If transparency is on and the selected color nibble is zero, no picture is drawn. In 258 color mode, jitter has no effect. CM0DE bit 2 The upper half bit color bit is in 16 color mode or 256 color mode, and CM0DE bit 3 is set. When this bit is set, the COLOUR command sets the lower half bit of the color register to the source The high nibble of the tuple. (Use uncompressed 16 colors to store ghosts, when the upper nibble is another ghost). If the lower nibble of the color register is zero, the picture is not displayed and transparency is turned on. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page) Installation-Line-Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Beigong Consumer Cooperative, this paper size is used in the middle of the home standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 male dragon) A 6 B 6 214588 V. Description of invention) CMODE bit 3 The complex bit has only 256 color modes. When this bit is set, the upper half of the color is locked. And the COLOR command only changes the low nibble. The transparency is calculated only from the low nibble. In the normal 256 color mode, if it is on, the transparency is calculated from all bits. ; 16 color mode examples

i b t r ο , $ CO (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木頁) colour i b t r o , 0000 設定色彩$ CO ;設定0 裝. 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 c o d e i b t r o, $97 colour plot i b t r o , $30 colour plot 畫圃色彩$ 線_ i b t r o, % 0 0 0 1 無畫圖,當色彩是$0 透明性開並且低半位 元組=0) 設定位元1 c m o d e i b t r o , $ 4 0 c o 1 u r 本紙張尺度通用中國國家樣準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公*) 44 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 五、發明説明(45) plot 畫圈色彩$ 0 (透明性蘭) STOP ;16色彩模式,位元2設定例子 i b t r ο , $ C 0 colour ;設定色彩$C0 ;256色彩模式,位元3設定例子 i b t r ο , $ CO colour i b t r o c o d e i b t r o colour plot i b t r o colour plot % 1000 47 $50 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木页) 設定色彩$ CO 設定位元3 畫團色彩$ C7 經濟部中央櫺準局貝工消f合作社印製 i b t r o c o d e i b t r o colour P ο 1 t % 100 1 60 本紙張尺度边用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公;¢) 當色彩是$ C0,不畫圃 (透明性開並且低半位元組 0) 設定位元3與位元1 畫_色彩$ C0 (透明性開) 45 Λ 6 Π 6 五、發明説明 STOP ;256色彩棋式,設定位元3舆位元2例子 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木ίί) 裝. 訂 線· 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 i b t r ο , $ C 0 colour i b t r o, ^ 110 0 c o d e i b t r o , $ 7 4 colour plot i b t r o , $ 0 3 colour plot ibt ro, ^1101 c η o d e ibt r o, $ 08 colour plot stop 許 如没有其它指定, 設定色彩$ CO 設定位元3與位元2 畫團色彩$ C7 當色彩是$C0,不耋圖 (透明性開與低半位 元組=0) 設定位元3 ,位元 2與位元1 畫圖色彩$ C0 (透明性開) 多瑪琍歐晶片暫存器有圃特別功能如上表所示·假 糸統須設到暫存器R0,當成目地暫存器 本紙張尺度边用中國囲家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公#) 46 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家榣準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公 4588_nj_ 五、發明説明4 7) 或來源暫存器依一個待定指令之所痛者。R0暫存器亦使用 成一個ALU叠積器。乘法指令,如上所述,返回一個32位 元結果。最低16位元儲存在暫存器R4中。暫存器R6使用於 相两一値分數正負號乘法指令(FRMULT),與一個長乘法指 令(LMULT)〇 暫存器R7與R8使用於執行MERGE指令。逭指令使二個 預先決定暫存器(亦即,暫存器R7, R8),相互結合在一起 ,以形成幽靈座播/資料。以座標資料用於定址一掴ROM表, 其映至一徧預先決定幽雄到一傾預先決定多邊形。該指令 是幫助有效執行紋理映到操作,利用組合部份的二個暫存 器,以定義下一個像素的色彩位址,谙像素被包含在靈内 映至到一個多邊形。 使用暫存器R11到R13以控制副常式執行。暫存器R11 當成副常式呼叫的連結暫存器,並且儲存程式計數器加1 的内容。暫存器R11的内容定義在一個循琢完成後必需存 取的位址。使用暫存器R12健存一値計數,以定義將被執 行循環的次數,循琛的位址儲存在暫存器R13。 如上所述,不論何時修改暫存器R14的内容,一値位 元組從R0M10在暫存器R14的所儲存位址讀出。於此方式, 實施一個延踁或緩衡READ操作,相鬭於如下識別的GET位 元組指令。 參照上表之a其它暫存器在程式ROM中將被執行 程式位置,使用一梅24位元址定址。此位置的最低16位元 在程式計數器中發現。最高位元定義程式組儲存在一値程 4 7 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再埙寫木页) 裝· *?τ- 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 4588_π_6 五、發明説明4 8) 式碼組(PC組)暫存器。 ROM組暫存器(ROMBANK)儲存最高位元,用於允許定址 餘存在R0M10之程式資料,並且附加到儲存在暫存器R14之 16位元ROM位址。類似地,RAM組暫存器)RAMBANK)儲存較 离位址位元,使用於允許瑪琍歐晶Η處理器,以存取在 RAM中之程式資料。使用RAM和ROM組暫存器的内容,相関 於瑪琍歃晶片ROM和RAM存取指令,偽用於有效延伸瑪琍歐 處理器的位址範圃。 銀幕畫面基底暫存器(SCB)用於儲存目標的虛位元映 至的位址。此目標能被創造,與旋轉,放大及減少。當執 行一傾PLOT像素指令時,銀幕畫面基底暫存器SCB,儲存 在RAM位址,其被存取並寫入資訊。 暫存器NBP你用於儲存位元平面的號碼。典型地,指 示使用2, 4或8平面。此外,使用一舾銀幕畫面列大小暫 存器SCS,以指定相阕於虛位元映至的資訊,以資訊係以 在列所包含字元數目表示。 以下所列的瑪利歐晶Η指令集,指令簡字符號( (nenonic),並且相鬭於解碼有關指令所執行之功能。首 先簡短註解説明一個相鼸指令的某些功能。 當瑪琍歐晶片完成它的操作時,執行stop指令,並且 操作設定'"GO"旗標為零,産生任何中斷信號到主CPU。 CACHE指令操作以定義一部份程式ROM,其被拷貝進入 瑪琍晶片快速RAM,並且從那裡執行。當執行CACHE指令時 ,程式計數器的内容載入快速基底暫存器,和以下説明的 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再褐离木頁) 裝< 線- 本紙張尺度逍用中國Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公龙) 48 Λ 6 η 6 214588 五、發明説明(4 9) 快速標識被重置。 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再艰"木页) 瑪琍歐晶片包括一連串延遲跳躇指令,執行在跳躍後 指令當成下表之指示。跳躍發生的位址相對於程式計數器 的内容。指令集基於如下表所說明條件,有各種不同廣泛 的延遲跳躍。 瑪琍歐晶片包含多徧 '"前置"指令,亦即to/with/ from。造些前置指令隱含後缠指令一徧資料分配。例如v TO"前置設定目地暫存器(DREG),使用於下一個指令。" FROM 〃前置設定來源暫存器(SReg),使用於下一個指令。 w WITH 〃前置設定二者。 大部份指令具有一個第二來源暫存器在此蓮算碼。假 如不利用前置指令設定SReg和DReg,則它們將預設到R0。 在每値指令後,SReg和DReg設定到R0。假如DReg設定到 R15,程式計數器使得下一値指令儲存其内容在R15,然後 起始一値週期延遲跳躍。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 其它前置指令設定高位元組的狀態暫存器之旗標,以 改變如下指令之操作。所有非前置指令清除高位元組的狀 態宇组。下列例子,係如何經前置指令修改後缠指令。 1 s r ;rO = rO 向右移 1 to r 4 ;r4 = r*0 向右移 1 1 s r from r 4 ; r*0 = r4 向右移 1 1 s r ;r0 = r4 向右移 1 alt 1 _ 本紙張尺度边用中國國家標準(CNS) T4規格(210X297公;《:) 4 9 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製 Λ 6 Η 6 五、發明説明〇) from r 6 to r 5 add r 7 ; r5 = r*6 + r7 +進位 alt 1 with r 3 add r 3 ; r*3 = r3 + r3 +進位(6502 rol) 如果在狀態暫存器設定'旗檫,修正'^ TO 〃指令 當成一锢a MOVE 〃指令操作。TO指令指定資訊移到暫存器 ,及F r ο B指令資訊來源。 STW指令儲存一個特定字在一個缓衝匾内,它不霹等 待,在執行下列指令之前直到完成一個儲存操作。依此方 式,一傾RAM的使用慢於處理器,不要不必需地使處理器 慢下來。 LOOP指令的執行減少一般暫存器R12的内容。假如 R12的内容不是零,則起始跳躍到R13所指定位址。ibtr ο, $ CO (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page) colour ibtro, 0000 set the color $ CO; set 0 to install. Codeibtro, $ 97 colour plot ibtro, $ 30 colour plot color drawing garden $ 线 _ ibtro,% 0 0 0 1 No drawing, when the color is $ 0 transparency is open and the lower nibble = 0) Set bit 1 cmodeibtro, $ 4 0 co 1 ur This paper size is common China National Standards (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 g *) 44 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 V. Description of invention (45) plot Circle color $ 0 (transparency blue) STOP; 16 color mode, bit 2 setting example ibtr ο, $ C 0 colour; setting color $ C0; 256 color mode, bit 3 setting example ibtr ο, $ CO colour ibtrocodeibtro colour plot ibtro colour plot% 1000 47 $ 50 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page ) Set color $ CO Set bit 3 Paint color $ C7 Printed ibtrocodeibtro colour P ο 1 t% 100 1 60 on paper size Use Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210x297; ¢) When the color is $ C0, do not draw the garden (transparency on and low nibble 0) set bit 3 and bit 1 to draw_color $ C0 (Transparency open) 45 Λ 6 Π 6 V. Description of the STOP; 256 color chess style, setting bit 3 and bit 2 example (please read the precautions on the back and fill in the wood) installation. Threading · Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed ibtr ο, $ C 0 colour ibtro, ^ 110 0 codeibtro, $ 7 4 colour plot ibtro, $ 0 3 colour plot ibt ro, ^ 1101 c η ode ibt ro, $ 08 colour plot stop If there is no other specification, set the color $ CO Set bit 3 and bit 2 group color $ C7 When the color is $ C0, do not draw (transparency on and low nibble = 0) set bit 3 , Bit 2 and Bit 1 drawing color $ C0 (transparency on) The multi-chip European chip register has special functions as shown in the table above. The dummy system must be set to the register R0, as a temporary register This paper uses the Chinese Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 公 #) 46 Beigong Consumer Cooperatives, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed This paper standard uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 public 4588_nj_ V. Invention description 4 7) or the source register according to a pending instruction. The R0 register is also used as an ALU stacker. The multiply instruction, as described above, returns a 32-bit result. The lowest 16 bits are stored in register R4. The register R6 is used for phase-by-value fractional multiplication instruction (FRMULT) and a long multiplication instruction (LMULT). The registers R7 and R8 are used to execute the MERGE instruction. The Japanese command makes two pre-determined registers (ie, registers R7, R8) to be combined with each other to form a ghost podcast / data. The coordinate data is used for addressing a slap ROM table, which is mapped to a pre-decided Youxiong to a pre-decided polygon. This instruction is to help effectively perform the texture mapping operation. The two registers in the combined part are used to define the color address of the next pixel. The pixel is included in the spirit and mapped to a polygon. Use registers R11 to R13 to control subroutine execution. The register R11 serves as a link register for subroutine calls, and stores the contents of the program counter plus 1. The content of register R11 defines the address that must be accessed after completion of the process. Use register R12 to store a value count to define the number of cycles to be executed. The address of Xun Chen is stored in register R13. As described above, whenever the contents of the register R14 are modified, a byte is read from the stored address in the register R14 of the R0M10. In this way, a delay or slow balance READ operation is implemented, corresponding to the GET byte command identified below. Refer to a of the above table for other registers to be executed in the program ROM. The location of the program will be addressed using a 24 bit address. The lowest 16 bits of this position are found in the program counter. The highest bit definition program group is stored in a program 4 7 (please read the precautions before writing wooden pages) **? Τ- Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4588_π_6 V. Description of the invention 4 8) Type code group (PC group) register. The ROM group register (ROMBANK) stores the highest bit, which is used to allow the address data stored in R0M10 to be stored, and is appended to the 16-bit ROM address stored in the register R14. Similarly, the RAM group register (RAMBANK) stores more distant address bits, and is used to allow the Ma Liuou Jing H processor to access program data in RAM. The contents of the RAM and ROM group registers, which are related to the Malyo chip ROM and RAM access instructions, are used to effectively extend the address range of the Malyo processor. The screen picture base register (SCB) is used to store the address to which the virtual bit of the target is mapped. This target can be created, and rotated, enlarged and reduced. When the one-pitch PLOT pixel instruction is executed, the screen picture base register SCB, which is stored at the RAM address, is accessed and written with information. The register NBP you use to store the number of bit planes. Typically, the indication uses 2, 4 or 8 planes. In addition, use an on-screen screen row size register SCS to specify the information to be mapped to the virtual bits, and the information system is represented by the number of characters included in the row. The Mario crystal instruction set listed below, the command abbreviation character ((nenonic), and related to decoding the function performed by the relevant instruction. First, a short note explains some of the functions of a relative instruction. When the Malyu When the chip completes its operation, it executes the stop command and sets the '" GO " flag to zero, generating any interrupt signal to the main CPU. The CACHE command operates to define a part of the program ROM, which is copied into the Maru chip Fast RAM, and execute from there. When the CACHE instruction is executed, the contents of the program counter are loaded into the fast base register, and the following instructions (please read the precautions on the back before browning the wood page) install &line; this For paper size, please use the Chinese Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 male dragon) 48 Λ 6 η 6 214588 V. Description of the invention (4 9) The quick logo is reset. (Please read the precautions before you go hard " Wooden Pages> Maruio chip includes a series of delayed jump instructions, which are executed as instructions in the following table after the jump. The address where the jump occurs is relative to the content of the program counter. The instruction set is based on the following table There are a variety of different delay jumps. The Maliou chip contains multiple '" front " instructions, that is, to / with / from. The creation of these front-end instructions implies a back-wrapping instruction for data distribution. For example v TO " Pre-set destination register (DREG), used for the next command. " FROM 〃pre-set source register (SReg), used for the next command. w WITH 〃pre-set both. Most commands have a second source register here. If SReg and DReg are not set with pre-commands, they will be preset to R0. After each command, SReg and DReg are set to R0. If DReg is set to R15, the program counter causes the next value command to store its content in R15, and then starts a value cycle delay jump. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Beigong Consumer Cooperative printed other pre-commands to set the status of high byte The flag of the memory to change the operation of the following instructions. All non-preceding instructions clear the status byte of the high byte. The following example shows how to modify the instructions after the pre-order instructions. 1 to r 4; r4 = r * 0 direction Right shift 1 1 sr from r 4; r * 0 = r4 shift right 1 1 sr; r0 = r4 shift right 1 alt 1 _ This paper scale uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) T4 specification (210X297); ": ) 4 9 Printed by the Beigongxiao F Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Λ 6 Η 6 5. Description of invention 〇) from r 6 to r 5 add r 7; r5 = r * 6 + r7 + carry alt 1 with r 3 add r 3; r * 3 = r3 + r3 + carry (6502 rol) If 'flag, correct' is set in the status register ^ TO 〃 instruction is treated as a MOVE 〃 instruction. The TO command specifies the information to be moved to the register, and the F r ο B command information source. The STW instruction stores a specific word in a buffer plaque. It does not wait, until a save operation is completed before executing the following instructions. In this way, the use of one-degree RAM is slower than the processor, and do not unnecessarily slow down the processor. The execution of the LOOP instruction reduces the contents of the general register R12. If the content of R12 is not zero, then jump to the address specified by R13.

Altl, Alt2和Alt3是前置指令,其設定在狀態暫存器 的上述旗樣,因此使得執行指令以不同方式绾譯,如下表 所示。 PLOT指令識別將畫圖像素X和Y銀幕畫面座標。並且 畫出利用COLOR指令所指定色彩,相對於X和Y座標上銀 幕畫面位(如暫存器R1和R2所示)。PLOT像素指令包括R1内 容的自動增加,像協助於高速度畫出水平線,並且免除包 含一偏額外增加指令。 設定Altl旗標,然後编譯PLOT指令,係一傾READ指令 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再蜞寫木页) 裝· 線· 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公釐) 50 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 Λ 6 Η 6 五、發明説明61) PIXEL指令(RPIX)。利用執行讀像素指令RPIX,在特#銀 幕畫面位置之像素的色彩讀出,亦可使用於從硬鼸淸除不 要的像素資訊。/ 讀像素指令RPIX,主要使用畫圈硬髏從字元矩陣反向 讀出,以決定指令所指定之一艏特定像素的色彩。COLOR 指令提供到色彩硬體,利用一個特定來源暫存器的内容而 定義下一餾像素的色彩。 * C MODE "指令設定色彩模式,與能使用於産生不同 待別效應,如上例所證明者。例如,使用CM0DE指令産生 一個抖動效應,在其另一個像素變質不同色彩,以産生一 個遂渐變化效應。CM0DE指令能使用於控制透明性,因此 一個幽靈先顯示然後將晝出背景顯示。透明性的決定僳利 用一傾色彩棋式相闋旗標的設定,如上例所示。 指令集亦包括一個小數正負數乘法,係用於旋轉多邊 形的計算,以決定所顯示目標的梯度或斜度。 增加指令,若使用於相闋暫存器R14,將從ROM起始一 鵃讀。GETC指令將從ROM存取位元組,並且載它進人色彩 暫存器。 下表指定出依據本發明實施例之一個瑪琍歐晶片指令 集,造些指令在上文已討論。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木页) 裝· 線. 本紙張尺度边用中Η Η家樣準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公釐) 51 Λ 6 Π 6 五、發明説明R2 ) 枏今隼 卜六准位 籣字符嫌 $〇〇 $01 $02Altl, Alt2 and Alt3 are pre-instructions, which are set in the above-mentioned flag of the status register, so that the execution instructions are translated in different ways, as shown in the following table. The PLOT command recognizes the coordinates of the X and Y screens that will be drawn. And draw the color specified by the COLOR command relative to the screen position on the X and Y coordinates (as shown in the registers R1 and R2). The PLOT pixel instruction includes the automatic addition of R1 content, like assisting in drawing horizontal lines at high speed, and is free from including a partial additional instruction. Set the Altl flag, and then compile the PLOT command, which is a READ command (please read the precautions on the back and then write the wooden page). Installation · Line · This paper standard uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 Mm) 50 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Λ 6 Η 6 5. Description of Invention 61) PIXEL Directive (RPIX). By executing the read pixel command RPIX, the color of the pixel at the position of the special #screen screen is read out, and it can also be used to remove unnecessary pixel information from the hard manta. / Read pixel command RPIX, which mainly uses circle hard bones to read out from the character matrix in reverse to determine the color of one specific pixel specified by the command. The COLOR instruction is provided to the color hardware, and uses the contents of a specific source register to define the color of the next pixel. * The C MODE " command sets the color mode, which can be used to produce different waiting effects, as demonstrated in the example above. For example, use the CM0DE instruction to generate a dithering effect, and change the color at another pixel to produce a gradient effect. The CM0DE command can be used to control transparency, so a ghost is displayed first and then the day is displayed in the background. The decision of transparency is based on the setting of a single-color chess-like flag, as shown in the example above. The instruction set also includes a decimal positive and negative multiplication, which is used to calculate the rotation polygon to determine the gradient or slope of the displayed target. Add instruction, if it is used in phase register R14, it will start reading from ROM. The GETC instruction will access the byte from the ROM and load it into the human color register. The following table specifies a Maryo chip instruction set according to an embodiment of the present invention. The creation of these instructions has been discussed above. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page). Packing and threading. The paper is used in the middle Η Η home sample standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 mm) 51 Λ 6 Π 6 5. Invention description R2) The six-level 籣 character of 楏 今 Hayabusa is $ 〇〇 $ 01 $ 02

STOP NOP CACHE $03STOP NOP CACHE $ 03

LSR 04LSR 04

ROL $ 0 5 η η BRA s b y t $ Ο 6 η η BGE sbyte 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 $ Ο 7 η η BLT sbyte 停止瑪琍歐晶H,並且産生 658 1 6 IRQ, g = 0 1週期無操作 設定快速基底到PC與重置快 速旗樣。(只有如果PC不等 於現在快速基底) 假如快速基底Orl5, 則快速基底=r 1 5 , 重置快速旗標。 邏輯向右移,DReg = DReg LSR 1 〇 進位向左從轉 DReg=SReg R0L1 必定相對地延羥跳躍 rl5 = rl5 +正負號位元組偏移 假如大於或等於,則相對的 延遲跳躍, 假如(s X 0 R v ) = 1 ,則 r 1 5 = rl5 +正負號位元組编移。 假如少於,則相對的延遲跳 躍, 假如(s XOR v)=0,則 r5=rl! +正負號位元組镉移。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木页) 裝. -線· 私紙張尺度逍用中S Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) _52_ 66 ΛΗ 五、發明説明5 3 ) $ 0 8 η η BNE s b y t 跳 0 延 的 對 相 則 等 相 如 假 $ 0 9 η n B E Q s b y t $ 0 a η n BPL sbyte 0 遲 延ΪΕΜ 的 + 的對15對 月 Γ 目 村 -I 丰。則 1 移則 移·lirn ,餳等 員組的組相0,元正元不z=位是,如位如躍如號如躍假號假跳假負假ROL $ 0 5 η η BRA sbyt $ Ο 6 η η BGE sbyte Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economics $ Ο 7 η η BLT sbyte Stop Maru Ou Jing H, and produce 658 1 6 IRQ, g = 0 1 cycle no operation to set fast substrate to PC and reset fast flag. (Only if the PC is not equal to the current rapid base) If the rapid base Orl5, then the rapid base = r 1 5, reset the rapid flag. Logic shifts to the right, DReg = DReg LSR 1 〇 Carry to the left and turn from DReg = SReg R0L1 must be relatively extended hydroxy jump rl5 = rl5 + sign byte offset if greater than or equal to, then the relative delay jump, if ( s X 0 R v) = 1, then r 1 5 = rl5 + sign byte shift. If less, then the relative delay jump, if (s XOR v) = 0, then r5 = rl! + Sign cadmium shift. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden page). Installed.-Line · Private paper standard for small use in S Η family standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 male dragon) _52_ 66 ΛΗ V. Invention description 5 3) $ 0 8 η η BNE sbyt Jumping to 0-delayed phase is equivalent to false $ 0 9 η n BEQ sbyt $ 0 a η n BPL sbyte 0 Delayed ΪΕΜ + pair 15 pairs monthly Γ Mmura-I Feng. Then 1 shift then shift · lirn, sugar, etc. The group phase is 0, the positive element is not z = the bit is, such as the bit is like a jump, such as a jump, a false jump, a false jump, a false negative

Z 則 負 正 + (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再堝寫本页) 躍如 跳假Z is negative, positive + (please read the notes on the back before writing this page)

S 則 負 正 + $ Ob n BMI sbyte 0 延 的 對 相 則 移的 偏負 組是 元如躍 位假跳 如 假 Γ 則 Γ 負 正 + $ 0 c η n BCC sbyt 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製 $ 0 d η n B C S sbyt 本紙張尺度边用中國Η家樣準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公*) 相 則 除 清 移標 偏旗躍 組位跳 元進遲 位如延 號假的 C 如 假 則 移 偏 組 元 位 TT 負 正 對 相 ΰ 貝 定 設 樣 旗躍 位跳 進遲 如延 假的假號 負 正 + 則 移 0 组 元 如位S is negative and positive + $ Ob n BMI sbyte 0 The extended negative pair of phase shifts is the element such as jump and false jump if false Γ then Γ negative and positive + $ 0 c η n BCC sbyt Central Bureau of Economics Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative in the US $ 0 d η n BCS sbyt The paper size is based on the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 g *). In addition to the removal of the standard deviation flag, the jump group bit jumps into the late position. Delayed false C shifts the component bit if it is false TT negative and positive phase ΰ Beiding set the sample flag to jump into the delay such as delayed false negative and positive + shifts 0 component if the bit

C 53 五、發明説明卢4) $ 0 e η n BVC sbyte $ 0 f η n BVS sbyte $ 1 0 - $ If TO r 0 ··· r 1 5 i f b : $ 20 - $ 2f MOVE WITH rO-r 15 $ 30-$ 3b STW (rn) 經濟部中央標準局员工消費合作社印製 if a 1 t 1 : STB (rn) 本紙張尺度遑用中B國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公*) _Π6_ 假如溢位淸除,則相對的延 運跳躍 假如v=0,則rl5=rl5+正負 號位元組鴒移 假如溢位設定,則相對的延 遯跳躍 假如v=l,則rl5=rl5+正負 號位元组瘺移 (前置)設定DReg to rn (目地暫存器使用於下一値 op) D R e g = r η rn = SReg (無旗標設定) (前置)設定DReg與SReg到 r η D R e g = r η S R e g = r n b = l 在rn位址儲存SReg RAM [rn] =SReg [低字元組/高 緩衝] [正常地宇元組在偁數位址] 在rn位址餘存低位元組的 SReg RAM[rn]=SReg.l [位元組緩 衝] _5^d (請先間讀背面之注意事項再蜞寫木页) Λ 6 B 6C 53 V. Description of invention Lu 4) $ 0 e η n BVC sbyte $ 0 f η n BVS sbyte $ 1 0-$ If TO r 0 ··· r 1 5 ifb : $ 20-$ 2f MOVE WITH rO-r 15 $ 30- $ 3b STW (rn) Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs if a 1 t 1: STB (rn) This paper is not used in China B National Standard (CNS) Grade 4 (210x297 g *) _Π6_ If the overflow is removed, then the relative delay jump If v = 0, then rl5 = rl5 + sign and byte shift If the overflow is set, then the relative delay jump If v = l, then rl5 = rl5 + positive and negative Number byte fistula migration (front) set DReg to rn (the destination register is used for the next value op) DR eg = r η rn = SReg (no flag setting) (front) set DReg and SReg to r η DR eg = r η SR eg = rnb = l store SReg RAM at the rn address [rn] = SReg [low character group / high buffer] [normally the tuple is at the number of addresses] remaining at the rn address Low-byte SReg RAM [rn] = SReg.l [Byte Buffer] _5 ^ d (Please read the precautions on the back before writing the wooden page) Λ 6 B 6

五、發明説明(5 5) $ 3c: LOOP $ 3d ALT1 $ 3e ACT2 $ 3f ACT3 $40〜$ 4b LDW(rn) if a 1 t 1 : LDB (rn) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 $ 4c5. Description of the invention (5 5) $ 3c: LOOP $ 3d ALT1 $ 3e ACT2 $ 3f ACT3 $ 40 ~ $ 4b LDW (rn) if a 1 t 1: Printed by LDB (rn) Beigong Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs $ 4c

PLOT 私紙張尺度边用中國Η家櫺準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公;《:) 減r 12 ,並且假如rl2<>0 , 則延遲跳躍到在r* 1 3的位址 〇 r 12 = rl2-l 假如 rl2<>0,則 rl5=rl3 (TO/WITH/FROM忽略) (前置)設定altl旗標 alf 1 = 1 (前置)設定a 112旗標 a 11 2 = 1 (前置)設定altl與a 1 t2旗標 a 1 t 1 = 1 a 1 t2 = 1 從在rn位址載入到DReg, DReg = RAM [rn] (字元組高/低等待) (正常地字元組偶位址) 從在rn位址載入到DReg,( 無正負號位元組) D R e g . h = 0 DReg. l=RAM[rn][位元組等 待] 在r 1 , r2 (x . g)畫圖像素,並 且增加r 1 (將不檢査H.B.rl與r2在銀 幕耋面上,並且將畫在RAM 任何地方) -^- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木ΙΪ) 裝- ,?τ- -線· f 的.4沾8 Λ 6 Η 6 五、發明説明(56) if a 1t1 :The PLOT private paper scale uses the Chinese Η Family Standard (CNS) A 4 specification (210X297 g; ":") minus r 12, and if rl2 < > 0, the delay jumps to the address at r * 1 3. 12 = rl2-l If rl2 < > 0, then rl5 = rl3 (TO / WITH / FROM ignored) (front) set altl flag alf 1 = 1 (front) set a 112 flag a 11 2 = 1 (Front) Set the altl and a 1 t2 flags a 1 t 1 = 1 a 1 t2 = 1 Load from the rn address into DReg, DReg = RAM [rn] (character group high / low wait) (normal Local byte even address) Loaded into DReg from the address at rn, (unsigned byte) DR eg. H = 0 DReg. L = RAM [rn] [byte wait] at r 1, r2 (x. g) draw pixels and add r 1 (HBrl and r2 will not be checked on the screen, and will be drawn anywhere in RAM)-^-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wood Ϊ ) Install-,? τ- -line · f of .4 dip 8 Λ 6 Η 6 V. Description of the invention (56) if a 1t1:

RP IX $ 4dRP IX $ 4d

SWAP $ 4eSWAP $ 4e

COLOUR if a 1 t 1 :COLOUR if a 1 t 1:

CMODE $50〜$5f ADD r 0 . r 1 5 if a 1 11 ίCMODE $ 50 ~ $ 5f ADD r 0. R 1 5 if a 1 11 ί

ADC if a 1 t2 :ADC if a 1 t2:

ADDADD

if a 111+a1t2 ADC $ 60〜$ 6F SUB r0 . r 1 5 it a 111 :if a 111 + a1t2 ADC $ 60 ~ $ 6F SUB r0. r 1 5 it a 111:

SBC 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製 if a 1 t2 :Printed by the SBC Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Beigongxiao F Cooperative if a 1 t2:

SUBSUB

if a 1 11 +a 1 t2 CMP $70if a 1 11 + a 1 t2 CMP $ 70

MERGE plot(rl,r2),rl=rl+l 在rl,r2(x,y)讀出像素的色 彩 DReg=point(rl,r2) 互換位元組 DReg.h = SReg. 1 DReg.l=SReg.h 設定PLOT色彩,畫圈色彩= S R e g DReg=N0T SReg 設定PLOT色彩,畫圃色彩= SReg DReg=SReg+rn DReg=SReg+rn+c DReg=SReg+ttn DReg=SReg+轉n+c DReg=SReg-rn DReg=SReg-rn-c DReg=SReg-#n SReg-rn (零旗標、正負號 旗標、進位旗標、溢位旗 標) 結合r7與r8的高位元組成 為 D R e g (請先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫木页) 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS)T4規格(210x297公;¢) Οϋ A&BB_Π6_ 五、發明説明(5 7) DReg.h = r7.h, D R e g . 1= r 8 h 經濟部中央櫺準局貝工消費合作社印製MERGE plot (rl, r2), rl = rl + l read the color of the pixel at rl, r2 (x, y) DReg = point (rl, r2) swap bytes DReg.h = SReg. 1 DReg.l = SReg.h Set PLOT color, circle color = SR eg DReg = N0T SReg Set PLOT color, picture garden color = SReg DReg = SReg + rn DReg = SReg + rn + c DReg = SReg + ttn DReg = SReg + turn n + c DReg = SReg-rn DReg = SReg-rn-c DReg = SReg- # n SReg-rn (zero flag, plus-minus flag, carry flag, overflow flag) Combining the upper bits of r7 and r8 is DR eg (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden pages) The paper standard is the Chinese National Standard (CNS) T4 specification (210x297 g; ¢) Οϋ A & BB_Π6_ V. Description of invention (5 7) DReg.h = r7 .h, DR eg. 1 = r 8 h Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Economic Development, Ministry of Economic Affairs

$ 71〜$ 7f AND rl . rl5 if a 111 : B IC if a 1t2: AND if a 111+a1t2 B IC $ 80〜$ 8f MULT rO . r 15 if a 1 11 : UMULT if a 1 t2 : MULT if a 1 11 +a 1 t2 UMULT 旗標有如下結果設定: s=bl5 OR b7 v=bl4 OR b6 OR s c=bl3 OR b5 OR v z=bl2 OR b4 OR c DReg=SReg AND rn DReg=SReg AMD NOT rn DReg=SReg AND tfn DReg = SReg AND NOT # n DReg = SReg*Rn (有正負號 8 x 8位元) DRegzSRegiSRn (無正負號 8 x 8位元) DReg = SReg:!:lfn(W IE M. Sfe 8 x 8位元) DRegzSRegUn (無正負號 8 X 8位元) (請先間讀背面之注意事項再璜寫木S) 本紙張尺度逍用中國Η家標準(CNS) f 4規格(210X297公龙) 5 7 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 五、發明説明(5 8) +六准位_簡字符譃 功 m $90$ 71 ~ $ 7f AND rl. Rl5 if a 111: B IC if a 1t2: AND if a 111 + a1t2 B IC $ 80 ~ $ 8f MULT rO. R 15 if a 1 11: UMULT if a 1 t2: MULT if The a 1 11 + a 1 t2 UMULT flag has the following result settings: s = bl5 OR b7 v = bl4 OR b6 OR sc = bl3 OR b5 OR vz = bl2 OR b4 OR c DReg = SReg AND rn DReg = SReg AMD NOT rn DReg = SReg AND tfn DReg = SReg AND NOT # n DReg = SReg * Rn (with sign 8 x 8 bits) DRegzSRegiSRn (without sign 8 x 8 bits) DReg = SReg:!: Lfn (W IE M. Sfe 8 x 8 digits) DRegzSRegUn (8 x 8 digits without sign) (please read the notes on the back before writing the wood S) The paper size is free to use the Chinese Standard (CNS) f 4 specifications (210X297 Gonglong) 5 7 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 V. Description of the invention (5 8) + Six-level _ 简 字 譃 功 m $ 90

SBK 9 1 - $ 94 L INK1-4 $ 95SBK 9 1-$ 94 L INK1-4 $ 95

SEX $96SEX $ 96

ASR if a 1 11 : D I V2 97ASR if a 1 11: D I V2 97

ROR 經濟部中央標準局员工消費合作社印製 $ 98 - $ 9d if a 1 11 : JMP r8 -r 1 3Printed by ROR Employee Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Standards $ 98-$ 9d if a 1 11: JMP r8 -r 1 3

L JMPL JMP

儲存SReg回到最後使用 RAM位址 連結返回位址到r 1 1 rll = rl5 + l·.· 4 正負號延伸低位元組到字 元組 DReg . [bl5-bl7] =SReg .[ b7] DReg. l=SReg. 1 算術向右移 DReg=SReg ASR 1 除2捨低位元 DReg=SReg ASR 1 假如 DReg=l,則 DReg=0 進位旗摞向右旋轉 DReg=DReg ROR 1 跳躍到rl3位址,rl5 = rn( 延遲跳躍) 長跳躍到r η位址,(R 0 Μ組 從 SReg) 並且重置快速記億體 rl5 = rn(延遲跳躍) 理才I? Π U如斬左盟=S R (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再填寫木页) 裝- 本紙張尺度边用中國Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公;《:) 58 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製Save SReg and return to the last one using the RAM address link to return the address to r 1 1 rll = rl5 + l ·. · 4 Sign to extend the low byte to the character group DReg. [Bl5-bl7] = SReg. [B7] DReg . l = SReg. 1 Arithmetic shift to the right DReg = SReg ASR 1 Divide by 2 low-order bits DReg = SReg ASR 1 If DReg = l, then DReg = 0 carry flag stack rotates to the right DReg = DReg ROR 1 Jump to rl3 address , Rl5 = rn (delayed jump) long jump to r η address, (R 0 Μ group from SReg) and reset the fast memory rl5 = rn (delayed jump) rationale I? Π U 如 斷 左 盟 盟 = SR (Please read the precautions before filling in the wooden pages) Binding-This paper is printed on the Chinese Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210x297); ":) 58 Printed by Beigongxiaof Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs system

214588 五、發明説明<59) $ 9e LOB $ 9f FMU LT Λ 6 B 6 (請先閲讀背而之注意I項再蜞寫木页) 裝. 線.214588 V. Description of the invention < 59) $ 9e LOB $ 9f FMU LT Λ 6 B 6 (please read the back and pay attention to item I before writing the wooden page). Install. Line.

if a 1 11 : LMULT $ a 0 - $ a f η η IBT r 0 - r 1 5 , s b y t e if a 111: LMS r0 -r 1 5 , byte if a 1t2: SMS rO-r 15 . byte 低位元組 D R e g . h = Ο DReg. l=SReg. 1 分數有正負號乘法, DReg=(SReg*r6) .hw (正負號16*16位元乘法), c = (SReg)ir6) .bl5 長正負號乘法,DReg=( SReg^rB).hw (正負號16*16位元乘法) r4 = (SReg*r6) . lw c=(SReg)*r6).bl5 載入r* n具有信號延伸位元 組 rn =立即位元組(正負號延 伸 從绝對移位位元組位址載 入r η rn = RAM[位元組<C1](字組 資料) 儲存r η到絶對移位位元組 位址 RAM[位元組<Cl]=rn (字組 資料) 本紙張尺度边用中國B家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公¢) 59 21.4588 Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明(gQ) $ b0-$ bf FROM r0-rl5 (重置)設定'S R e g = r η S R e g = r n i f b : MOVES S R e g = r n (零旗標、正負號旗標溢 位旗標(正負號低位元組 $ cO H IB 高位元組,DReg.h = 0 DReg. l=SReg. 1 $ c 1 - $ c f OR rl-rl5 DReg=SReg OR Rn if. a 1 11 : XOR DReg=SReg XOR Rn if a 1 t 2 : OR DReg=SReg OR »n if a 1 11 + a 1 t 2 XOR DReg = SReg Xor # n $ d 0 - $ d e INC rO-r 1 4 增加rn r n = r n 11 (忽略 TO/WITH/FROM) $ df GETC 從ROM缓衝器獲得位元組 到P COT色彩 if a 1 t 2 : RAO RAM資料組暫存器=SReg if a 1 11 + a 1 t 2 ROMB RAM資料組暫存器=SReg $ e 0 - $ e e DEC r〇-rl4 減 rn, rn = rn-l (忽略 TO/ W ITH/FROM) $ ef G ETB 從ROM缓衝區獲得無正負 號位元組到DReg DReg = ROM缓衡位元組,零 延伸 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫木fi) 裝. ’1T_ 線. 本紙張尺度边用中國Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) 60 214588 Λ 6 η 6if a 1 11: LMULT $ a 0-$ af η η IBT r 0-r 1 5, sbyte if a 111: LMS r0-r 1 5, byte if a 1t2: SMS rO-r 15. byte low byte DR eg. h = Ο DReg. l = SReg. 1 Fraction has sign multiplication, DReg = (SReg * r6) .hw (sign 16 * 16 bit multiplication), c = (SReg) ir6) .bl5 long sign Multiplication, DReg = (SReg ^ rB) .hw (sign 16 * 16 bit multiplication) r4 = (SReg * r6). Lw c = (SReg) * r6) .bl5 loading r * n with signal extension bit Group rn = immediate byte (sign extension extends from the absolute shift byte address to load r η rn = RAM [byte < C1] (word data) stores r η to the absolute shift bit Group address RAM [Bytes < Cl] = rn (character data) This paper uses the Chinese B standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 g) 59 21.4588 Λ 6 Η 6 Central Bureau of Standards Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperative V. Description of Invention (gQ) $ b0- $ bf FROM r0-rl5 (Reset) Set 'S R eg = r η SR eg = rnifb: MOVES SR eg = rn (zero flag, positive and negative signs Flag overflow flag (sign low byte $ cO H IB high byte , DReg.h = 0 DReg. L = SReg. 1 $ c 1-$ cf OR rl-rl5 DReg = SReg OR Rn if. A 1 11: XOR DReg = SReg XOR Rn if a 1 t 2: OR DReg = SReg OR »n if a 1 11 + a 1 t 2 XOR DReg = SReg Xor # n $ d 0-$ de INC rO-r 1 4 Increase rn rn = rn 11 (ignore TO / WITH / FROM) $ df GETC from ROM Buffer gets bytes to P COT color if a 1 t 2: RAO RAM data set register = SReg if a 1 11 + a 1 t 2 ROMB RAM data set register = SReg $ e 0-$ ee DEC r〇-rl4 minus rn, rn = rn-l (TO / W ITH / FROM is ignored) $ ef G ETB Obtain unsigned bytes from the ROM buffer to DReg DReg = ROM buffer bytes, zero Extend (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wooden fi) to install. '1T_ line. This paper scale uses the Chinese standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 male dragon) 60 214588 Λ 6 η 6

五、發明説明(βΐ) if a 111 : GETBH5. Description of the invention (βΐ) if a 111: GETBH

if a 1t2: GETBLif a 1t2: GETBL

if a 111+a1t2 GETBS 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 $ f 0 - $ ffnnnn IWT r 0 -r15, 宇組 i f a 1 11 : L M r 0 - r 1 5 , 字組 從ROM嫌衝區獲得到DReg 的高位元組 D R e g = R 0 Μ缓衝匾位元組, 及低混合 DReg=(SReg& $ FF) + (位 元組<C8)(使用W ITH) 從ROM缓衝匾取得送到 DReg的低位元組 DReg = R0M緩衝位元組,及 高混合(使用W ITH) 從ROM緩衝區取得正負號 位元組送到DReg DReg = R0M緩衝位元組,正 負號延伸 載入立即字組到rn rn =立即字組(緩衝) 從絶對字組位址載入r*n rn = RAM[宇組位址](宇組 資料) 儲存rn到絶對字組位址 if a 1 t2 : SM rO-r 15, 宇組 圖6到團17顯示圖4A與4 B之進一步詳細組件的方塊圔 。欲更淸楚表現本發明獨待之特色,對熟悉該行業專業人 士所習知電路,若有混淆此獨特特色者,於以下圖中將不 本紙張尺度逍用中國Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公龙) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再塡寫木页) 經濟部中央標準局员工消費合作社印製 214588 __Be _ 五、發明説明备2 ) 予顯示。 * 如圖6所示,在ALU單元50之範例算術和灌輯單元。 ALU50如圏4A及圓6所示,供合到X, Y和Z匯流排。因此, 瑪琍歃晶片一般暫存器到鍋合到ALU。 ALU50利用一個16位元加法器/減法器152,以執行加 法與減法功能。ALU50亦包括傅統'"AND Λ邏輯18路154, * 01^遍輯霣路156,以及'、互斥輯霄路158。 ALU亦包括傅統移位功能電路,其中任何進位旗標位 元移到最离位元位置。並且其結果經由線160鍋合到多工 器164的一個輸人端。此外,ALU50執行傅統位元組交換操 作,因此,在匯流排上最低位元組和最位元組也可以交換 。並且其結果在線162上到多工器164。X和Y匯流排縝合到 霄路152、154、156和158,如園6所示。 從加法器/減法器152,電路154、156、158,移位暫 存器,和交換功能等输出,蝌合到16位元,6個輪入一到 一個、、結果"多工器164。依所解碼結果而定,其適當結 果像输出到目地匯流排Z。 加法器/減法器152,除由X匯流排接收16位元外,亦 接收在X匯流排上向前地資訊,或指令其本身之資訊,依 指令解碼器輸入到多工器150而定。 此外,ALU50包括一鹤CPU旗標産生霣路166。CPU旗標 «路168産生零溘位、正負號、與進位信號,使用於載入 到霣路166内至少一偁旗標暫存器。從指令解碼電路60設 定CPU旗樣,此S路解碼指令所産生的進位旗檫致能,零 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再艰寫木页) 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公釐) 62 214588 Λ 6 η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明6 3 ) 旗標致能,正負號旗標致能與溢位旗樣致信信號。使得旗 樣設定依利用加法器/滅法器152所決定之相鼷條件而定。 旗標亦被基於輪入到旗標電路166之目的匯流排Ζ的内容( 或結果)而設定。使用旗標,例如,基於一個廣範圍的條 件,而觸發條件跳躍之操作。 圖7、8Α與8Β像園4Α的圈素畫電路(52、54、56和58) 之進一步說明。該電路執行PLOT命令,此命令取得一個特 定X和Y座揉,並且在逭銀幕畫面座擦上畫一健像素,此 像素色彩是利用COLOR命令載入色彩暫存器54的内容所指 定的。 須注意,超级NES使用一儸字元映至顯示畫面。晝圖 硬髏操作轉換像素座樺位址資料,成為宇元映至位址資料 〇 超级NES字元定義在位元平面。字元可以是2, 4或8 位元平面,用於定義4, 16或256色彩。宇元定義的每位元 組,包括一掴位元平面的一列像素的字元,定義像素従左 到右,高位元到低位元。對一餡256色彩楔式的操作,需 更新8個RAM位置。 像素畫圈硬體包括一値當地緩衝機構,該機構包括一 個色彩矩陣206,其儲存將被顯示為一個特定位元組之所 有位元,因為所有這些位元最終均需更新。一掴位元平面 計數器28縝合到色彩矩陣鬣路208。像素座標從X和Y匯 流排,載入到畫圏X與畫圓Y暫存器202,204。於目前實 施例中,一般暫存器R1與R2,使用成如圖7所示畫_X暫 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再填寫木页) 裝- 線- 本紙张尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS)肀4規格(210X297公釐) 63 M4588 Λ 6 15 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製 五、發明説明(g4) 存器202與畫團Υ暫存器204。逭些暫存器像素的X和Υ座 擦,如利用PLOT命令所指定者。 畫圏X與Y暫存器202, 204縞合到全及半加法器,俱 基於字元位址計算電路,输出於位址上到一値位置筒移位 電路214,其依序網合到一個畫圍位址暫存器216與一値位 址比較器218。畫圖X暫存器的三最低位元網合到一個解 多器212,其依序縝合到一傾位元未定暫存器210。 如_8冉所示畫圓控制器200,接收信號指示已解碼一 個PLOT像畫(PLOT)或READ像素命令,與如下所述之其它控 制倍號。盡圏控制器2 0 0 ,産生畫團霣路控制信號,以如 下所述方式而使用。 如上所示,畫圖控制電路200,産生控制信號用於像 素畫圔硬體52内。如 8A所示,像素控制電路200,從位 元未定暫存器210接收輪出,此输出經AND閘201,耩合到 像素控制電路200。如果位元未決暫存器210的所有8位元 被設定,則通知此像素控制邐輯200,跳過一傾讀週期, 並且在色彩矩陣206之資訊寫出至RAM。 像素控制電路200亦響應於PLOT命令,以起始其操作 。像素控制邏輯200亦響應於READ像素命令PRIX,以起始 完全相同之操作,除新資訊未寫到色彩矩陣206,使用於 输出到RAM外。如上所述,假如霈知道銀幕畫面上一個待 定像素的色彩可執行此READ像素命令,並且亦可用於清除 色彩矩陣上之現在資訊。 控制器200並接收一悃RAM完成控制信號RAMD0NE,用 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再埙寫木頁) 裝. .?!_ 線. 本紙張尺度逍用中國B家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) 64 21.4588 Λ 6 η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明15 ) 於指示該RAM存取己完成。RAM完成信號,如上所述,.亦於 增加以位元平面設計數器208,以識別在色彩矩陣206的一 備位元平面。畫圈控制器200從位址比較器218接收PLEQ信 號,其指示已有一個位址相符合,並且不需寫出色彩矩陣 206之内容到RAH,因此指示對現在色彩矩陣内容更新應繼 繍。畫圖控制器200,則接收銀幕畫面模式SCR、MD控制信 號,通知畫園控制器200需讀和寫多少位元組。 畫圖控制電路200産生一個倒出控制信號DUMP,參考 圖7和8B,其使得色彩矩陣206的内容被緩衝在它的第二 缓衝段。此外,控制器200産生一個淸除位元未定暫存器 信號CLRPND,與一個載人位元未定暫存器控制信號LDPND, 並縝合此信號到此位元未決暫存器210。此外,控制器200 相蘭於色彩矩陣元素之LDPfX與BPR控制信號,傜於圖8B説 明。 利用指令解碼器對PLOT命令解碼,與PLOT信號輸入到 晝画控制器200,起始載入未定信號LDPHD之産生,其先決 條件是像盡團硬驩不忙。LDPND信號鍋合到位元未定暫存 器210,致能資料的載入從解多工器212進入位元未定暫存 器210。産生清除未定信號CLRPND, »應於RAM。RAM完成 信號RAMD0NE,指示未定資料已寫出到RAM。之後,空出此 位元未定暫存器,俾用於下一《像素晝圖資訊。 時序圇顯示利用畫圖控制器200,所接收之各種信號 間的鼷像。如圖8C所示之各種不同位址與資料信號,其它 相闋控制信號,與畫圖控制器産生輸出控制信號。如範例 (請先間讀背面之注意事項再填寫木3) 本紙張尺度边用中Η Η家標準(CNS)«F4規格(210X297公龙) 65 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明§ 6 ) 位址位值、資料值等,只為說明的目的。 如下是畫圖硬醱52之操作。當晝圈控制器200決定盡 _硬鱧52不忙。如圈4Α所示,色彩暫存器54的内容載入到 8Χ 8色彩矩陣霣路206的水平行。利用列載入色彩矩陣200 ,並利用行讀出。利用一個COLOR命令更新色彩暫存器54的 内容。色彩暫存器54是一傾暫存器,經由此任何後繍PLOT 命令將載入色彩資料到色彩矩陣。 於色彩矩陣206的垂直位置,其色彩暫存器位元所載 入者,你利用在畫圏X暫存器202儲存三最低位元所決定 。因此,畫圖位址的此三最低位元定義一行的位元,該等 位元色彩矩陣206被更新。 使用位元未定暫存器210,以記錄所欲更新銀幕畫面 宇元段的特定位元。暫存器210包括16値暫存器旗標,該 旗樺指示將被寫入銀幕畫面的部份之位元。谨應於一痼信 號LDPND載入位元未定暫存器210,並且利用畫團控制器 210産生一個信號CLRPND所清除。 如果將執行一個後鑛畫圖命令,俾在相同地匾更新銀 幕映至。對一個已知位元重覆操作,同時相闋於一個像素 之增加色彩資料,被載入到8X8色彩矩陣206。然後,經 儲存在畫鬮X暫存器202之最低位元的畫圖位址,9 一掴 位元設定到位未定暫存器210。一個特定位元經耦合到耋 圜X暫存器202的一鏟3到8解多工器212,載入到位元未 定暫存器210。如果更新像素多於8個像素,或者如果它 佔在不同垂直位置,則已寫到矩陣2 0 6之資料需讀出到 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項#埙寫木页) 本紙張尺度逍用中國Η家楳準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) 66 214588 Λ 6 η 6 經濟部中央標準局ΚΧ工消費合作社印製 五、發明説明b 7) RAM6(或8)。此後,空間色彩矩陣206,接收新色彩資料, 直到接收一傾後鑛耋圖命令,霈寫入到RAM9,色彩矩陣 206的目前内容缓衡於像素畫圖器硬龌内,亦即,在色彩 矩陣206内。 當從色彩矩陣2 06的資料寫到RAM6或8時,做位址轉換 計算,使用如圖7所示邏輯閘,全及半加位法器電路,以 轉換X、Y座樺成為一個RAM位址。本範例的實際位址計算 說明如下。此計算將變化,依所使用者是4, 16或256色彩 模式而定。以256色彩模式為範例之計算。 該256色彩字元具有4方塊的16傾位元組,每個定義 位元平面對,用於總共64個位元組。 結構一個位元映至,僳用在所需銀幕畫面地區的每個 位置上,放置一値唯一字元。當在相鼷於超级NES畫圖時, 最好以列安排字元。 例如: (128像素高銀幕畫面) 字元號碼 0 1 6 3 2 ...... 1 1 7 3 3 ...... 2 1 8 2 4 ...... • · · • ♦ ♦ 1 5 3 1 4 7 ...... 超级HES不受限於256宇元,因此位元映至大小主要受 限於記億腥與DMA傳送時間。瑪琍歐晶片能畫圓在,例如, 6 7 本紙張尺度边用中國圃家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公釐) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙埙寫木页) 裝· *1T_ 線· Λ 6 I? 6 0 214588 五、發明説明 (68> 128與160像素离銀幕畫面上。最大銀幕耋面是32字元或 2 56像素。 以下演算法範例說明如何使用列結構安排位元映至, 以控制像素畫麵。 首先,從X座標的最低三位元,計算一艏像素掩蔽( ask)使用於所有位元平面。 像素號碼 掩蔽 % 10000000 01000000 (請先閲1,?背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝· 7 % 00000001 其次,使用移除低3位元之Y座標,計算下列之褊移 ,給字元於下列,然後利用字元的大小相乘。 銀幕畫面色彩 宇元大小以位元組計 4 16 訂_ 線. 16 32 經濟部中央標準局員工消t合作社印製 256 6 4 再其次,從移除低3位元的X座標,計算字元列的頂 部之偏移。列大小是列字元的數目乘以宇元大小。 正常列大小 字元高度 16 20 4 256位元組 320位元組 色彩 16 512位元組 640 本紙張尺度逍用中B國家櫺準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公龙) 68 214588 Λ 6 \\6 五、發明説明(6 § 經濟部中央標準局貝工消t合作社印製 256 1024位元組 1280位元組 Y 座 樣 的 低 3 位 元 給 在 字 元 下 之 位 元 組 偏 移 〇 全 部 镉 移 加 上 現 在 位 元 映 至 的 指 樣 9 m 得 像 素 保 有 一 位 元 平 面 之 位 元 組 的 位 址 〇 後 鑛 位 元 平 面 偽 可 蘧 擇 之 1 位 元 組 » 然 後 15個 位 元 組 最 後 使 用 像 素 掩 蔽 而 設 定 或 清 除 像 素 位 元 〇 在 每 位 元 平 面 之 位 元 設 定 或 清 除 9 使 得 成 為 色 彩 號 碼 相 闋 位 元 的 狀 態 時 0 這 號 碼 依 像 素 之 所 需 儲 存 在 色 彩 m 存 器 54 0 程 式 碼 的 範 例 以 65816程式碼在4 位元平面上奎圖, 使用成遊樂器展 示 此 常 式 大 部 份 都 是 表 驅 動 暫 存 器 A, X與Y 是 1 6位 元 Se t C ο 1 0 U Γ « 取 得 色 彩 及 二 倍 Id a C 〇 1 0 U Γ as 1 a t a X • 設 定 色 彩 掩 蔽 9 使 用 於 位 元 平 面 與 1 Id a m as k 1 t a b X St a m a s k 1 9 設 定 色 彩 掩 蔽 » 使 用 於 平 面 2 與 3 1 d a η a s k2 t a b, > F s t a m a s k2 Γ t s 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CHS)甲4規格(210X297公址) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再塡离本頁) 裝. 訂_ 線· Λ 6 Η 6 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再堝寫本頁) 314588 五、發明説明(7Q)if a 111 + a1t2 GETBS Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs $ f 0-$ ffnnnn IWT r 0-r15, Yu group ifa 1 11: LM r 0-r 1 5, the word group is from the ROM suspect area Obtained DReg high byte DR eg = R 0 Μ buffer plaque byte, and low mixed DReg = (SReg & $ FF) + (byte < C8) (using W ITH) buffer plaque from ROM Get the low byte sent to DReg DReg = R0M buffer byte, and high mix (use W ITH) to get the sign byte from the ROM buffer and send it to DReg DReg = R0M buffer byte, the sign is extended to load Immediate block to rn rn = Immediate block (buffering) Load from absolute block address r * n rn = RAM [Yu group address] (Yu group data) Store rn to absolute block address if a 1 t2 : SM rO-r 15, Yu group Figures 6 to 17 show the block details of the further detailed components of Figures 4A and 4B. If you want to show the unique features of this invention alone, for those who are familiar with the circuits that are familiar to professionals in this industry, if you confuse this unique feature, you will not use the Chinese standard (CNS) A in the paper below 4 Specifications (210X297 male dragon) (Please read the precautions before writing the wooden page) 214588 __Be _ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of Invention 2) for display. * As shown in Figure 6, an example arithmetic and editing unit in the ALU unit 50. The ALU50 is shown in circle 4A and circle 6 for connection to the X, Y and Z busbars. Therefore, the Maruchip chips are generally registered from the scratchpad to the ALU. ALU50 uses a 16-bit adder / subtractor 152 to perform addition and subtraction functions. ALU50 also includes Fu Tong's " AND Λ logic 18 channels 154, * 01 ^ all edited roads 156, and ', mutually exclusive edited roads 158. The ALU also includes a Fourier shift function circuit in which any carry flag bit is moved to the most distant bit position. And the result is connected to an input end of the multiplexer 164 via line 160. In addition, the ALU50 performs the operation of swapping bytes, so that the lowest byte and the most byte on the bus can also be exchanged. And the result is on line 162 to multiplexer 164. The X and Y busbars merge into Xiaolu 152, 154, 156 and 158, as shown in Park 6. Output from adder / subtractor 152, circuits 154, 156, 158, shift register, and swap function, etc., up to 16 bits, 6 rounds into one, and result " multiplexer 164 . Depending on the decoded result, the appropriate result image is output to the destination bus Z. The adder / subtractor 152, in addition to receiving 16 bits from the X bus, also receives the forward information on the X bus, or the information of the command itself, depending on the input of the command decoder to the multiplexer 150. In addition, ALU50 includes a crane CPU flag generation 霣 路 166. CPU Flag «Road 168 generates zero-bit, plus-minus, and carry signals, and is used to load at least one flag register in the 霣 路 166. Set the CPU flag sample from the command decoding circuit 60, the carry flag generated by this S-channel decoding command is enabled, zero (please read the precautions on the back and then write the wooden page hard) This paper standard uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 62 214588 Λ 6 η 6 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Invention Description 6 3) Flag enable, positive and negative flag enable and overflow flag-like letter signals. The flag setting depends on the phase condition determined by the use of the adder / de-energizer 152. The flag is also set based on the content (or result) of the bus Z that is intended to be passed to the flag circuit 166. Use flags, for example, to trigger a conditional jump based on a wide range of conditions. Figure 7, 8Α and 8Β image garden 4Α circle picture circuit (52, 54, 56, and 58) further description. The circuit executes the PLOT command. This command obtains a specific X and Y block and draws a healthy pixel on the screen frame. The color of this pixel is specified by the content of the color register 54 loaded by the COLOR command. It should be noted that the Super NES uses a 㑩 character to map to the display screen. Day map The operation of the hard bones converts the address data of the pixel block to become the data from the Yuyuan map to the address data. The Super NES character is defined in the bit plane. Characters can be 2, 4 or 8 bit planes, used to define 4, 16 or 256 colors. Each byte defined by Yuyuan includes the characters of a row of pixels in a slap bit plane, and defines the pixels from left to right, high bit to low bit. For a filling 256 color wedge operation, 8 RAM locations need to be updated. The pixel circle hardware includes a local buffer mechanism, which includes a color matrix 206, whose storage will be displayed as all bits of a particular byte, because all these bits will eventually need to be updated. A slap bit plane counter 28 is coupled to the color matrix 208. The pixel coordinates are loaded from the X and Y busbars into the drawing circle X and drawing circle Y registers 202, 204. In the current embodiment, the general registers R1 and R2 are used as shown in Figure 7 _X temporary (please read the notes before filling in the wooden page) Standard (CNS) 4 specifications (210X297 mm) 63 M4588 Λ 6 15 6 Printed by Beigongxiao F Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (g4) Memory 202 and Temporary Memory 204. The X and Y erases of some register pixels are as specified by the PLOT command. The picture registers X and Y registers 202, 204 are combined into full and half adders, which are based on the character address calculation circuit, and output from the address to a value position tube shift circuit 214, which is sequentially combined to A picture address register 216 and a value comparator 218 are provided. The three least significant bit networks of the drawing X register are combined into a demultiplexer 212, which is sequentially combined into a tilted undetermined register 210. As shown in _8 Ran, the circle controller 200 receives a signal indicating that a PLOT picture (PLOT) or READ pixel command has been decoded, and other control multiples as described below. As much as possible, the controller 200 generates the control signal for the engraving group and uses it in the following manner. As shown above, the drawing control circuit 200 generates control signals for use in the pixel picture hardware 52. As shown in FIG. 8A, the pixel control circuit 200 receives the round from the undetermined register 210, and this output is coupled to the pixel control circuit 200 via the AND gate 201. If all 8 bits of the bit pending register 210 are set, the pixel is notified to control the set 200, skip a read cycle, and write the information in the color matrix 206 to RAM. The pixel control circuit 200 also responds to the PLOT command to start its operation. The pixel control logic 200 also responds to the READ pixel command PRIX to start the exact same operation, except that the new information is not written to the color matrix 206 and is used for output to RAM. As mentioned above, if you know the color of a pending pixel on the screen, you can execute this READ pixel command, and it can also be used to clear the current information on the color matrix. The controller 200 also receives a RAM complete control signal RAMD0NE, which is installed with (please read the precautions on the back before writing wooden pages) ..?! _ Line. This paper scale is free to use the Chinese B Family Standard (CNS) A 4 Specifications (210x297 male dragon) 64 21.4588 Λ 6 η 6 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention 15) Instructed that the RAM access has been completed. The RAM completion signal, as described above, is also added with a bit plane set counter 208 to identify a spare bit plane in the color matrix 206. The circle controller 200 receives the PLEQ signal from the address comparator 218, which indicates that an address has already been matched, and there is no need to write the content of the color matrix 206 to the RAH, so it indicates that the current color matrix content update should be continued. The drawing controller 200 receives the screen picture mode SCR and MD control signals and informs the drawing garden controller 200 how many bytes to read and write. The drawing control circuit 200 generates a dump control signal DUMP, referring to FIGS. 7 and 8B, which causes the content of the color matrix 206 to be buffered in its second buffer section. In addition, the controller 200 generates a clear bit register signal CLRPND and a manned bit register control signal LDPND, and integrates this signal to the bit pending register 210. In addition, the controller 200 is related to the LDPfX and BPR control signals of the color matrix elements, as illustrated in FIG. 8B. The command decoder is used to decode the PLOT command, and the PLOT signal is input to the day drawing controller 200, and the generation of the indefinite signal LDPHD is initially loaded. The prerequisite is that it is as hard as possible. The LDPND signal is closed into the bit-instant register 210, enabling the loading of data from the demultiplexer 212 into the bit-instant register 210. CLRPND is generated to clear the pending signal, »it should be in RAM. The RAM completion signal RAMD0NE indicates that undetermined data has been written to RAM. After that, this bit-unscheduled register is vacated for use in the next "Pixel Day Map Information". The timing chart displays the image of various signals received by the drawing controller 200. Various address and data signals as shown in FIG. 8C, other phase control signals, and the drawing controller generate output control signals. As an example (please read the precautions on the back before filling in the wood 3). The paper is used in the middle Η Η family standard (CNS) «F4 specification (210X297 male dragon) 65 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau shellfish Printed by the consumer cooperative 5. Description of invention § 6) Address value, data value, etc., are for illustrative purposes only. The following is the operation of drawing hard hard 52. When the diurnal controller 200 decides that the hard snake 52 is not busy. As shown in circle 4A, the contents of the color register 54 are loaded into the horizontal row of the 8 × 8 color matrix 206. Load the color matrix 200 with columns, and read with rows. The contents of the color register 54 are updated using a COLOR command. The color register 54 is a tilt register, and the color data is loaded into the color matrix through any subsequent PLOT command. In the vertical position of the color matrix 206, the bits of its color register are loaded, you decide by storing the three least significant bits in the picture X register 202. Therefore, the three lowest bits of the drawing address define a row of bits, and the bit color matrix 206 is updated. The undetermined bit register 210 is used to record specific bits of the Yuyuan segment of the screen image to be updated. The register 210 includes a 16-bit register flag, which indicates the bit to be written to the part of the screen. It is desirable to load the undetermined register 210 into a signal LDPND, and use the group controller 210 to generate a signal CLRPND to clear it. If a post mine drawing command will be executed, the screen will be updated to the same plaque. Repeating operations for a known bit, while adding color data to one pixel at a time, is loaded into the 8X8 color matrix 206. Then, through the drawing address stored in the lowest bit of the drawing X register 202, 9-slap bits are set to the in-place register 210. A specific bit is coupled to the shovel 3 to 8 demultiplexer 212 of the X register 202, and is loaded into the bit undetermined register 210. If the update pixel is more than 8 pixels, or if it occupies a different vertical position, the data written to the matrix 2 0 6 needs to be read out (please read the notes on the back # 埙 写 木 页) Printed with the Chinese 漳 楳 quasi (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 male dragons) 66 214588 Λ 6 η 6 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs KKXC Consumer Co., Ltd. 5. Description of invention b 7) RAM6 (or 8). After that, the spatial color matrix 206 receives the new color data until it receives a dumping command and writes it to the RAM9. The current content of the color matrix 206 is slowly balanced in the pixel plotter, that is, in the color matrix Within 206. When the data from the color matrix 2 06 is written to RAM 6 or 8, the address conversion calculation is performed, using the logic gate shown in FIG. 7 and the full and half bit adder circuit to convert the X and Y blocks into a RAM bit. site. The actual address calculation in this example is explained below. This calculation will vary depending on whether the user is in 4, 16 or 256 color mode. Calculate with 256 color mode as an example. The 256 color characters have 16 tilt bytes of 4 squares, each defining a pair of bit planes, for a total of 64 bytes. One bit is mapped to the structure, and it is used at every position on the screen area of the desired screen, and a unique character is placed. When drawing on the Super NES, it is best to arrange characters in columns. For example: (128 pixels high screen image) Character number 0 1 6 3 2 ...... 1 1 7 3 3 ...... 2 1 8 2 4 ...... • · · • ♦ ♦ 1 5 3 1 4 7 ...... Super HES is not limited to 256 yuan, so the bitmap to size is mainly limited by the memory and DMA transfer time. The Maliou wafer can draw circles, for example, 6 7 sheets of paper with Chinese Pujia Standard (CNS) Grade 4 specifications (210x297 mm) (please read the notes on the back of the book written by Sun Xun). * 1T_ line · Λ 6 I? 6 0 214588 V. Description of the invention (68> 128 and 160 pixels off the screen. The maximum screen size is 32 characters or 2 56 pixels. The following algorithm example shows how to use the column structure arrangement Bits are mapped to to control the pixel picture. First, calculate the bow pixel mask from the lowest three bits of the X coordinate for all bit planes. Pixel number masking% 10000000 01000000 (Please read 1, back first Please pay attention to this page and then fill out this page.) Pack · 7% 00000001 Next, use the Y coordinate of the lower 3 digits to remove, calculate the following shift, give the characters below, and then multiply the size of the characters. Screen color The size of Yuyuan is calculated in bytes 4 16 lines_ 16 lines. 16 32 Printed 256 6 4 by the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Central Standards Bureau staff elimination cooperative. Secondly, remove the lower 3 bits of the X coordinate and calculate the top of the character row The offset. The column size is the number of column characters multiplied by the yuan Small. Normal column size Character height 16 20 4 256 bytes 320 bytes color 16 512 bytes 640 This paper standard is used in the national standard B (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 male dragon) 68 214588 Λ 6 \\ 6 V. Description of the invention (6 § The lower 3 bits of the Y block sample of 256 1024 bytes and 1280 bytes are printed by the Peking Gongxiao Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs to give the byte under the character bias Shift all the cadmium shift and add the current bit mapping finger to 9 m. The pixel holds the address of the octet of the octet plane. After the bit plane is pseudo-selectable 1 octet »Then 15 Bytes finally use pixel masking to set or clear pixel bits. 0 Set or clear 9 bits in each bit plane so that the color number is in the state of the bit 0. This number is stored in the color m according to the needs of the pixel. The example of the memory 54 0 code is displayed on the 4-bit plane using the 65816 code, which is displayed as a musical instrument Most of this routine is a table-driven register A, X and Y are 16-bit Se t C ο 1 0 U Γ «Get color and double Id a C 〇1 0 U Γ as 1 ata X • Set color mask 9 Used for bit plane and 1 Id am as k 1 tab X St amask 1 9 Set color mask »Used for plane 2 and 3 1 da η as k2 tab, > F stamas k2 Γ ts Use the Chinese National Standard (CHS) A 4 specifications (210X297 public address) (please read the precautions on the back and then leave this page) to install. Order _ line · Λ 6 Η 6 (please read the precautions on the back before writing) This page) 314588 V. Description of the invention (7Q)

Plot ;取得水平和垂直座標 ;二倍二者並且移到Y和X暫存器Plot; Get horizontal and vertical coordinates; Double both and move to Y and X registers

Ida pi o t x 1 a s 1 a t a y » Y是X座標*2 Ida pl o t y 1 a s 1 a tax • X是Y座標*2 ;取得饍移Ida pi o t x 1 a s 1 a t a y »Y is the X coordinate * 2 Ida pl o t y 1 a s 1 a tax • X is the Y coordinate * 2; get the meal shift

Ida pyoftab, x ;加上列偏移的開始 c 1 c ade poxftab, y ;加上二倍緩衝指標(選擇位元映至) c 1 c adc drawaap 經濟部中央櫺準局貝工消t合作社印製 tax ;x是從位元映至基底保持所需像素字組的偏移 ;y是像素*2的X座標 ;做位元平面0與1 lda.l bitmapbase, X;取得字組所保持像素 and pbittabn, y;掩蔽舊像素色彩 sta pnask 本紙張尺度通用中國B家櫺準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公徒) 214538 Λ 6η 6 五、發明説明(7 ρIda pyoftab, x; plus the start of the column offset c 1 c ade poxftab, y; plus double the buffer index (selected bit mapping to) c 1 c adc drawaap Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Industry and Commerce Cooperative Society Tax; x is the offset from the bitmap to the base to maintain the required pixel block; y is the X coordinate of the pixel * 2; do bit plane 0 and 1 lda.l bitmapbase, X; get the pixel held by the block and pbittabn, y; masking the old pixel color sta pnask. The paper size is universal Chinese B Family Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297) 214538 Λ 6η 6 V. Invention description (7 ρ

Ida η a s k 1 ;掩 蔽 色 彩 以 及 and P b i 11 a b , y ;像 素 掩 蔽 在 一 起 ora P a s k ;與 其 它 像 素 相 連 s t a . 1 bitnapbase, X ; 儲 存 到 位 元 映至 經濟部中央標準局貝工消t合作社印製 ;做位元平面2與3 , 1 d a . 1 bit屋apbase + 16, x and pbittabn, y s t a pnask Ida m a s k 2 and pbittab, y ora pnask s t a . 1 bit霾apbase + 16,x r t s ;像素位元掩蔽對的256字組表P b i 11 a b r e p t ; nuffl-col dv $ 8080, $ 4040, $ 2020· $ 1010, $ 0808, $ 0 40 4, $ 0 20 2 , $ 0101 e n d r ;上述表具有反向字組 P b i 11 a b η rept 32 ; num-col dw $ 7f77f , -$ 40 40,-$ 2 020,- $ 1010, - $ 808· $ 404, - $ 20 2,- $ 101 71 本紙張尺度逍用中B Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公址) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再塡寫木頁) ^14588 Λ 6 Η 6 五、發明説明(7 2) e n d r ;使用於平面0&1之列掩蔽(Ο到15列) a s k 1 t a b d v $ 000 0 ,$ OOf f , $ f f 00 , $ f f f f , $ 00 00 , $ OOf f ,$ f f 00 , $ f f f f d v $ 00 00 ,$ 00 f f , $ f f f f , $ OOf f , $ OOf f , $ f f 00 ,$ f f f f ;使用於 平面2 & 3之列掩蔽 (0到15列 ) i&ask2tab d v $ 0000 ,$ 0 000 , $ 0000 , $ 0000 , $ OOf f , $ OOf f ,$ OOf f , $ OOf f d v $ f f 00 ,$ f f 00 , $ f f 00 , $ f f f f , $ f f f f , $ f f f f ,$ f f f f , $ f f f f c ο 1 - s i z e e q u Nu b e r -char -Γ 0 w s * & * N u b e r - bit -planes (16) (4) ;到字元列表的開始之偏移 p y 〇 f t a b t e is p = 0 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再塡寫本頁) 裝< ,可_ 線- 經濟部中央楳準局貝工消t合作社印製 rept 32 ;字元列的數目 d v te腫p, te^p, te雇p, t e b p , tenp, tenp, te祖p t e臛p te.p=te.p+col-size e n d r ;镉移下列表 本紙張尺度逍用中國H家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公釐) 72 214588 Λ 6η 6 經濟部中央楳準局貝工消t合作社印製 五、發明説明(7 3) p t o f t a b t e 祖 p = 0 rep 16;字元行的數目 d v t e 臟 p dtf te麗p+2 dw teap+4 dw teap+6 dw te颶p+8 d v t e b p + 1 0 dw tenp+12 dw teap+14 teap=temp+32 e n d r 回到圈7更詳細之内容,在銀幕畫面上X與Y座標定義 將被畫像的位置,其被載人PLOT X與Y暫存器202及204,( 其暫存器也許在暫存器方塊76中R1及R2暫存器)。金圈位 址的最低三位元載入到PLOT X暫存器202,定義在一偁位 元平面位元組的該位元,被X與Y座標寫入或指定。叠積器 R0的内容載入到色彩矩陣206的列,此矩陣利用X暫存器 202的最低位元選擇。 如果畫圖X暫存器202是0,則將更新8位元所定義像 素之最高位元。若畫匾X暫存器202是0,則3對8解多工器 212將設定最低位元,並且在位元未定暫存器210成為《輯 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝· 訂_ 線. 本紙張尺度通用中國國家櫺準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公龙) 73 五、發明説明(7 4) RAM控制器88使用位元未定暫存器210,以指示不需從 RAM寫出之空除,因為位元未定暫存器2 10之相闋位元指示 不需修正。 位元未定暫存器210當成一値像素掩蔽Uask)緩衝器, 以防止從RAM覆Μ新資料,假如此新資料不是所期望需要 者。欲執行這方式,如圖7所示位未定暫存器210的市容, 則耩合成输入到色彩矩陣電路206。 如果此BIT-PENDING暫存器210是零,計算出像素的銀 幕畫面位址,同時載入到一個畫圃位址暫存器216,並在 位元組第像素位置被設定相同於在BIT-PENDING暫存器 210之位元。如果BIT-PENDING暫存器210是非零,則設定 BUSY旗標。 如果新計算位址等於PL0T-ADDR暫存器216的内容,則 在BIT-PENDING暫存器210内設定新像素位元位置,並且重 置B0SY旗標。 如果新位址不同於PL0T-ADDR暫存器的内容,則採取 如下步驟: 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再埙寫本頁) 步驟1:假如BIT-PENDING暫存器210包含FFH,則直接到步 驟3。 步驟2:從RAM在PLOT-ADDR + scr.基底謓位元組,進人一艏 暫時資料缓衡器,PLOT-BUFF。 步驟3:假如利用BIT-PEND暫存器210掩蔽資料缓衝位元後 ,則所有相等於PLOT-COLOR暫存器陳列的第0行, 直接到步驟5。 本紙張尺度逍用中SS家樣準(CNS)T4規格(210X297公釐) 7 4 Λ 6 Π 6Ida η ask 1; mask color and and P bi 11 ab, y; pixel masking together ora P ask; connect with other pixels sta. 1 bitnapbase, X; save in place and map to Beigong Xiaot Cooperative of Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Print; do bit planes 2 and 3, 1 da. 1 bit house apbase + 16, x and pbittabn, ysta pnask Ida mask 2 and pbittab, y ora pnask sta. 1 bit haze apbase + 16, xrts; pixel bit Masked pair of 256-word table P bi 11 abrept; nuffl-col dv $ 8080, $ 4040, $ 2020 · $ 1010, $ 0808, $ 0 40 4, $ 0 20 2, $ 0101 endr; the above table has reverse Word group P bi 11 ab η rept 32; num-col dw $ 7f77f,-$ 40 40,-$ 2 020,-$ 1010,-$ 808 · $ 404,-$ 20 2,-$ 101 71 Happy Use B Η Family Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 public address) (please read the precautions on the back before writing wooden pages) ^ 14588 Λ 6 Η 6 V. Description of invention (7 2) endr; use in Plane 0 & 1 column masking (Ο to 15 columns) ask 1 tabdv $ 000 0, $ OOf f, $ ff 00, $ ffff, $ 00 00, $ OOf f, $ ff 00, $ ffffdv $ 00 00, $ 00 ff, $ ffff, $ OOf f, $ OOf f, $ ff 00, $ ffff; used for plane 2 & 3 column masking (0 to 15 (Column) i & ask2tab dv $ 0000, $ 0 000, $ 0000, $ 0000, $ OOf f, $ OOf f, $ OOf f, $ OOf fdv $ ff 00, $ ff 00, $ ff 00, $ ffff, $ ffff, $ ffff, $ ffff, $ ffffc ο 1-sizeequ Nu ber -char -Γ 0 ws * & * N uber-bit -planes (16) (4); Offset to the beginning of the character list py 〇 ftabte is p = 0 (please read the precautions on the back before writing this page) install < _ line-rept 32 printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Economics and Trade Cooperatives; number of character rows dv te Swollen p, te ^ p, te hire p, tebp, tenp, tenp, te ancestor pte 臛 p te.p = te.p + col-size endr; cadmium is removed from the list. The paper size is free to use the Chinese H family standard (CNS ) A 4 specifications (210x297 mm) 72 214588 Λ 6η 6 Printed by Beigongxiaot Cooperative, Central Bureau of Economics, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of invention (7 3) ptoftab te ancestor p = 0 rep 16; the number of character rows dvte dirty p dtf te li p + 2 dw teap + 4 dw teap + 6 dw te hurricane p + 8 dvtebp + 1 0 dw tenp + 12 dw teap + 14 teap = temp + 32 endr Return to circle 7 for more details. On the screen, the X and Y coordinates define the position to be imaged. It is loaded with PLOT X and Y registers 202 and 204, (the register may be in (R1 and R2 registers in register block 76). The lowest three bits of the gold circle address are loaded into the PLOT X register 202, which is defined as a bit in a single bit plane byte group, and is written or specified by the X and Y coordinates. The contents of the stacker R0 are loaded into the columns of the color matrix 206, which is selected using the lowest bit of the X register 202. If the drawing X register 202 is 0, the highest bit of the pixel defined by 8 bits will be updated. If the plaque X register 202 is 0, the 3 to 8 solution multiplexer 212 will set the lowest bit, and the register 210 in the undetermined bit will become "Edit (please read the notes on the back before filling this page ) Binding · Order _ line. This paper standard is common to China National Standards (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 male dragon) 73 V. Description of the invention (7 4) RAM controller 88 uses the undetermined register 210 to indicate There is no need to write out the space from the RAM, because the bit position of the unregistered register 2 10 does not need to be corrected. The undetermined bit register 210 is used as a pixel masking buffer to prevent overwriting of new data from RAM if the new data is not what is expected. To perform this method, as shown in FIG. 7, the cityscape of the undetermined register 210 is synthesized and input to the color matrix circuit 206. If the BIT-PENDING register 210 is zero, the on-screen pixel address of the pixel is calculated and loaded into a painting address register 216 at the same time, and the pixel position in the byte is set the same as in the BIT- The bit of the PENDING register 210. If the BIT-PENDING register 210 is non-zero, the BUSY flag is set. If the newly calculated address is equal to the content of the PLOT-ADDR register 216, the new pixel bit position is set in the BIT-PENDING register 210, and the BOSY flag is reset. If the new address is different from the content of the PL0T-ADDR register, take the following steps: Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before writing this page) Step 1: If BIT -PENDING register 210 contains FFH, then go directly to step 3. Step 2: From RAM in PLOT-ADDR + scr. Base byte, enter the first batch of temporary data buffer, PLOT-BUFF. Step 3: If the data buffer bits are masked with the BIT-PEND register 210, then all the lines equal to the 0th row of the PLOT-COLOR register display, go directly to step 5. The specifications of the SS standard (CNS) T4 (210X297mm) for this paper standard for easy use 7 4 Λ 6 Π 6

2145SB 五、發明説明(7 5) 步驟4:寫PLOT-COLOR暫存器陳列的第0行,進入利用ΒΙΤ-PENDING暫存器致能PLOT-BUFF之所有位元。寫 data-buff回到 PL0T-ADDR的 RAM。 步想5:做相同操作(PL0T-ADDR + 1),與PLOT-COLOR暫存器 陳列的第0行。 步驟6:假如是8或256色彩模式,做相同操作於(PL0T- ADDR + 16),與PLOT-COLOR暫存器陳列的第2行。 繼續直到更新所有色彩位元。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再埙寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消t合作社印製 畫 圔 X與畫圜Υ座 樣 20 2 , 240的 内 容 * 利 用 如 圖 7 所 代 表 全 加 法 器 與 半 加 法 器 代 表 之 0 全 和 半 加 法 器 F A和 Η A $ 及 相 閿 邏 輯 罨 路 的 構 造 , 已 被 簡 化 如 國 7 之 方 塊 EBI 國 〇 如 下 t=Ss· 兀 成 位 址 計 算 : 位 址 S C r - b a s e + 2 穿y [0 … 2] + ( y [3“ •7 ]=» 16 + ( (X [3 … 7] 窣4 ) & & sc Γ ** h t) ^ c h a r -S i Z e 中 間 項 是 • y 7 y 6 y 5 y 4 y 3 X 7 X 6 X 5 X 4 X 3 0 0 X 7 X 6 X 5 X 4 X 3 〇 0 〇 〇 P χ9 P x 8 P x7 P X 6 P X 5 P X 4 P X 3 P X 2 P X 1 P x0 因 此 産 生 一 艟 1 〇位 元 部 份 結 果 P X [0 … 9] • 使 用 9 例 如 6 値 全 加 法 器 與 4 健 半 加 法 器 〇 該 結 果 給 到 一 艏 12 X 3方式多工器, 利用C ha r - si z e 值 控 制 欲 移 位 部 份 的 結 果 t 則 對 所 選 擇 銀 幕 畫 面 楔 式 進 入 正 確 精 度 〇 此 組 合 y較低位元y [0 … 2] f 形 成 一 個 1 6位 元 銀 裝· 訂_ 線- 本紙張尺度边用中國國家楳準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公龙) 7 5 Λ 6 η 6 214588 五、發明説明) 幕畫面位址。欲完成位址計算,則加到screen-base值 scr[9…22],其允許銀幕畫面放置在lk的邊際。 然後,該位址縝合到一偭2位置桶移位器214,利用 1或2或4乘以位址資訊輪入,相開於是否選擇4, 16,或 256色彩解析度。 移位電路214的輸出縝合到一個畫圖位址暫存器216, 此暫存器霣成RAM位址的緩衝區儲存。因執行畫圓命令後, 需缓衝此位址。暫存器R1和R2的内容,亦即,畫圖X和畫 園Y,也許會改變。 位址比較器218,比較利用畫圖硬醍笛成從移位電路 214输出所決定之新位址,和儲存在畫圓位址暫存器216之 舊位址。假如位址不同,則此位址需寫出到RAM。位址比 較器218産生一個控制倍號PLEQ[俱網合到耋圖控制器200] ,假如儲存在位址暫存器216的畫圜位址相等於移位電路 214的输出。 回到色彩矩陣206,如上所述,色彩矩陣206以列方式 讀出。一鏑位元平面計數器208,網合到色彩矩陣206,並 且定義該列讀出。位元平面計數器208鍋合到RAM控制器, 並且完成一個RAM操作。此RAM控制器88産生一傾信號,增 加位元平面計數器208。 色彩矩陣2 0 6 ,包括如圔8 B所示之一値陣矩的元素。 共64傾此種元素在8X8矩陣206的矩陣元素。當解碼此畫 _命令,控制器2 0 0網合指令控制信號L D P I X到門閂2 2 0 , 以致能從色彩暫存器54載入色彩資料C0L到門閂。利用控 本紙张尺度逍用中a國家標毕(CNS)T4規格(210X297公龙) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙填寫本頁) 裝. 訂_ 經濟部屮央榣準局员工消奸合作社印製 81. 4·〗0,000張(H) 76 經濟部屮央櫺準局A工消"合作杜印製 五、發明説明7(7 ) 制器200産生控制信號DUMP,指示在色彩矩陣206内第一層 次緩衝,並且資料需输出到銀幕畫面。一旦産生DUMP信號 ,儲存在門閂200的資料網合到閘電路226,以及門閂228 。當DUMP信號活性地鍋合到閘電路226,此閘電路網合資 料到門閂228。同時,除能閘224,依序防止保持先前儲存 資料之門閂228的反向輸出,免於遛餿循琢。 當從RAM所讀之資料,埴充到資料空隙,控制信號 BPR提供一傾零输人到閘222,與此LDRAM信號將在一個零 狀態。於這些情況下,從RAMP輸入之資料輸入將經閘電路 226,進入門閂228。門閂228資料然後可使用讀出,經此 RAM控制器88到RAM資料匯流排,如圓7所示。組合其它此 種元素,轉換利用X, Y像素識別所指示像素資料,成為相 容於超级NES字元格式的字元資料。 如圈9所示RAM控制器88,産生相關於遊樂器卡匣RAM 之不同控制信號。超级NES、瑪琍歐晶Η内畫圖硬體52, 以及執行瑪琍歃晶片程式所抓取資料,共同卡匣RAM。RAM 控制器88確保在適當時間送適當位址到RAM位址匯流排。 在適當仲裁邏輯310控制,如圖10所示。 RAM控制器88,包括多工器304,俾以多工從RAM資料 脚經RAM D資料匯流排之输入,與指令匯流拂二者之間。 指令匯流排或RAM資料匯流排的選擇,偽響應於從指令解 碼器60所接信號,並且放置適當RAM输出在目地Z匯流排 上。 RAM控制器88亦包括一個16位元資料暫存器300,像保 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#塡寫本頁) 本紙if·尺度边用中8«家楳準仰5)?4規格(2】0父297公龙) y 7 81. 4. 10,000張(H) 214588 Λ 6 Β6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製 五、發明説明(78) 存寫到RAM資料,其從16位元X匯流排,或16位元Y匯流 排,均在從指令解碼器60所接收信號控制之下。載入到資 料暫存器300的資料分成一個低位元組,與一傾高位元組, 並且經多工器302網合到RAM資料脚,多工器響應於從指令 解碼器60接收一値信號,輸出低或高位元組。 RAM控制器88亦包括一個20位元位址多工器308。多工 器308鬱應於從仲裁電路310所接收之一個控制信號,以選 擇一値位址输入,其中仲裁電路出自碼確認PACK,資料確 c 認DACK,或畫團確認PACK信號,偽在仲裁電路310所産生 的。從超级NES位址匯流排HA的位址信號,利用多工器308 所接收,並且經記億體時序信號産生器312,網合到RAM位 址匯流排,無論何時瑪琍歐a擁有者"狀態位元皆設定為 零時。仲裁電路310通知瑪琍歃晶片RAM擁有者的狀態,經 網合到仲裁電路310的信號RAN。此仲裁電路亦接收一個 RAM更新控制信號RFSH。RAN和RFSH信號係 ''或"邏輯在一 起,以形成如圏1 0所示之w暫停〃信號。 位址多工器308,亦從16位元多工器暫存器306,接收 一傾位址输入。多工器暫存器306接收Y匯流排的内容, 或指令匯流排的内容,依指令解碼器60所産生一個選擇信 號而定。多工器308亦接收資料組暫存器314的輸出,當成 一傾位址輸入與程式計數器PC的内容一起,如圖9所示。 銀幕晝面組暫存器316输出,使用於形成输入到多工器308 畫圖位址的最高位元,從圖7的晝圖霄路輸入成為較低位 元。銀幕畫面組暫存器316與資料組暫存器314,從主資料 ^- (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再塡寫本頁) 裝· 訂 線- 本紙張尺度边用中Η B家樣準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公赞)2145SB 5. Description of the invention (7 5) Step 4: Write line 0 of the PLOT-COLOR register display, and enter all the bits that enable the PLOT-BUFF using the BIT-PENDING register. Write data-buff back to the RAM of PL0T-ADDR. Step 5: Do the same operation (PL0T-ADDR + 1), line 0 on the display with the PLOT-COLOR register. Step 6: If it is 8 or 256 color mode, do the same operation in (PL0T-ADDR + 16), and the second row of the PLOT-COLOR register display. Continue until all color bits are updated. (Please read the precautions on the back before writing this page) Printed picture X and picture Υ20 20, 240 printed by the Beigongxiaot Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs * Use the full addition represented in Figure 7 The structure of the full and half adders FA and Η A $ represented by the adder and the half adder and the phase logic path has been simplified as shown in the block of country 7 EBI country 〇 as follows t = Ss Address SC r-base + 2 wear y [0… 2] + (y [3 “• 7] =» 16 + ((X [3… 7] 窣 4) & & sc Γ ** ht) ^ char -S i Z e The middle term is • y 7 y 6 y 5 y 4 y 3 X 7 X 6 X 5 X 4 X 3 0 0 X 7 X 6 X 5 X 4 X 3 〇0 〇〇 P χ9 P x 8 P x7 PX 6 PX 5 PX 4 PX 3 PX 2 PX 1 P x0 therefore produces a 1-bit partial result PX [0… 9] • Use 9 such as 6-value full adder and 4 half-adder. The result is a bow 12 X 3 Mode multiplexer, using the value of C ha r-si ze to control the result of the part to be shifted t, then wedging into the correct accuracy for the selected screen image. This combination y is lower bit y [0… 2] f forms a 1 6-bit silver outfit · Order_ Line-This paper scale uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 male dragon) 7 5 Λ 6 η 6 214588 5. Description of the invention) Screen address. To be completed The address calculation is added to the screen-base value scr [9… 22], which allows the screen image to be placed on the margin of lk. Then, the address is matched to a 2-position barrel shifter 214, using 1 or 2 Or 4 is multiplied by the address information round, depending on whether you choose 4, 16, or 256 color resolution. The output of the shift circuit 214 is coupled to a drawing address register 216, and the register is used as a RAM address buffer for storage. After executing the circle drawing command, this address needs to be buffered. The contents of registers R1 and R2, that is, drawing X and drawing Y, may change. The address comparator 218 compares the new address determined from the output of the shift circuit 214 by drawing a hard frame and the old address stored in the circular address register 216. If the address is different, this address needs to be written out to RAM. The address comparator 218 generates a control multiplier PLEQ [all network integrated into the map controller 200], if the picture address stored in the address register 216 is equal to the output of the shift circuit 214. Returning to the color matrix 206, as described above, the color matrix 206 is read out in columns. A dysprosium bit plane counter 208 is meshed to the color matrix 206 and defines the column readout. The bit plane counter 208 is coupled to the RAM controller and completes a RAM operation. The RAM controller 88 generates a tilt signal to increment the bit plane counter 208. The color matrix 2 0 6 includes elements of one of the matrix moments as shown in Figure 8B. A total of 64 such elements are in the matrix elements of the 8X8 matrix 206. When the picture_command is decoded, the controller 200 meshes the command control signal L D P I X to the latch 2 2 0, so that the color data C0L can be loaded from the color register 54 to the latch. Use the control paper size to use the Chinese National Standard (CNS) T4 specifications (210X297 male dragons) (please read the precautions to be filled out by Sun to fill in this page). Order_ _ Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative printed 81.4.0,000 sheets (H) 76. Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Industry and Commerce A. Co., Ltd. 5. Du Du Printing 5. Description of Invention 7 (7) The controller 200 generates a control signal DUMP, which is indicated in the color matrix The first level in 206 is buffered, and the data needs to be output to the screen. Once the DUMP signal is generated, the data stored in the latch 200 is coupled to the gate circuit 226 and the latch 228. When the DUMP signal is actively closed to the gate circuit 226, the gate circuit network is fed to the latch 228. At the same time, the disabling gate 224 sequentially prevents the reverse output of the latch 228 that keeps the previously stored data from being sloppy. When the data read from the RAM is filled into the data gap, the control signal BPR provides a zero input to the gate 222, and the LDRAM signal will be in a zero state. In these cases, the data input from the RAMP will enter the latch 228 via the gate circuit 226. The latch 228 data can then be read out via this RAM controller 88 to the RAM data bus, as indicated by circle 7. Combining other such elements, the pixel data indicated by the X, Y pixel identification is converted into character data compatible with the Super NES character format. As shown in circle 9, the RAM controller 88 generates different control signals related to the RAM of the game cartridge. Super NES, Maru Ou Jing H internal drawing hardware 52, and the data captured by the Maru Chan chip program, the common cassette RAM. The RAM controller 88 ensures that the appropriate address is sent to the RAM address bus at the appropriate time. The appropriate arbitration logic 310 controls, as shown in FIG. The RAM controller 88, including the multiplexer 304, is used for multiplexing input from the RAM data pin through the RAM D data bus and between the command bus and the command bus. The selection of the command bus or RAM data bus is pseudo-responsive to the signal received from the command decoder 60, and the appropriate RAM output is placed on the destination Z bus. The RAM controller 88 also includes a 16-bit data register 300, such as a security (please read the back-end notes first # 塡 write this page) if this paper is used in the standard 8 «家 楳 quasi-up 5)? 4 Specification (2) 0 father 297 male dragon) y 7 81. 4. 10,000 sheets (H) 214588 Λ 6 Β6 Printed by the Beigongxiao F Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Invention description (78) Store and write to RAM data It is under the control of the signal received from the instruction decoder 60 from the 16-bit X bus or the 16-bit Y bus. The data loaded into the data register 300 is divided into a low byte, and a tilt high byte, and meshed to the RAM data pin via the multiplexer 302, the multiplexer responds to receiving a value signal from the command decoder 60 , Output low or high byte. The RAM controller 88 also includes a 20-bit address multiplexer 308. The multiplexer 308 should respond to a control signal received from the arbitration circuit 310 to select a value address input, in which the arbitration circuit is derived from the code confirmation PACK, the data confirmation DACK, or the painting group confirmation PACK signal. Generated by circuit 310. The address signal from the Super NES address bus HA is received by the multiplexer 308 and is networked to the RAM address bus via the mega-signal timing signal generator 312, no matter when the owner of Mario Europea "; When the status bits are set to zero. The arbitration circuit 310 notifies the status of the owner of the chip RAM RAM, and the signal RAN of the arbitration circuit 310 is networked. The arbitration circuit also receives a RAM update control signal RFSH. The RAN and RFSH signals are '' or '' logic together to form a w pause signal as shown in Figure 10. The address multiplexer 308 also receives a tilt address input from the 16-bit multiplexer register 306. The multiplexer register 306 receives the contents of the Y bus, or the contents of the command bus, depending on a selection signal generated by the command decoder 60. The multiplexer 308 also receives the output of the data set register 314 as a tilt address input together with the contents of the program counter PC, as shown in FIG. The output of the screen day surface group register 316 is used to form the highest bit input to the drawing address of the multiplexer 308, and the input from the day road of FIG. 7 becomes the lower bit. Screen picture group register 316 and data group register 314, from the main data ^-(please read the precautions before writing this page) Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 praise)

2I45BB Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明(79) 匯流排HD載入資料,並且可利用主CPU存取。這些暫存器, 如圏9所示,不需在RAM控制器88其本身實施,但寧可其 内容網合到RAM控制器,資料組暫存器314也許,例如,如 下所述在ROM控制器104,並且銀幕畫面暫存器也許,例如 ,在耋圖硬體52實施。 多工器308輸入信號如下選擇。如果産生碼確認信號 CACK,則選擇碼組與程式計數器PC。如果産生資料確認信 號DACK,則遴擇資料組加多工器暫存器輸入。如果出現奎 圖確認信號PACK,則選擇耋圖位址。最後,如果沒有CACK ,DACK,或PACK出現,則選擇主(亦卽,SNES)位址輸入。 多工器308的20位元位址输出,縞合到記億體時序信 號産生器312,俥在適當時間網合這些位址信號到RAM6, 8。記億體時序信號産生器312,從仲裁方塊310的格雷計 數器接收輪出。記億體時序信號産生器312,解碼從格雷 計數器之輸出,並且如麗1所示經RAM位址匯流排RAMA, 産生使用於位址RAM6, 8之輸出信號。另一種方式,時序 信號産生器312,將産生用於存取RAM6, 8之控制信號,包 括行位址選通RAS,列位址遘通CAS,與寫致能WE信號,如 圏1所示。 記億體時序信號産生器312産生一掴DONE信號,像回 到仲裁邏輯310,以指示完成RAM週期。記億釅時序佶號産 生器3 1 2 ,亦産生一個資料門閂信號D A T L A T ,其門閂從外 部RAM的資料,進入RAM控制器88的資料門閂(未顯示)。從 RAM資料然後,例如經RAM資料匯流排RAMD-IN,锶合到瑪 -- 本紙張尺度逍用中Η Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公货) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝· 線· 214588 66 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明6 Ο ) 琍歐晶片電路。從時序信號産生器312的該RAMA位址信號 输出,網合到在遊樂器卡匣上任何靜態RAM上。如果遊樂 器卡匣上使用動態RAM,則産生控制信號CES, RAS和WE。 依瑪琍歐晶Η的結構,適當地産生靜態或動態RAM信號, 如上述可選擇的電阻器設定所指示。如疆9A所示,利用時 序信號産生器312所産生範例時序信號,與其它相關信號 。如所述資料值及範例位址只是基於說明的目地。如圖 8C所示為RAM DONE信號。 部份地利用仲裁邏輯310,在適當時間控制RAM存取信 號的産生。如圖10所示,仲裁遍輯310接收記億醴存取輸 入相鼷於信號CACHE要求CACHERQ,資料要求DAT、RQ,及耋 Λ 圖要求PLTRQ。毎傾這些輸人信號暫時儲存在門閂32 5, 327, 329。如果一傾瑪琍歐指令是在RAM或ROM範圍外執行 ,起始此程序利用一掴快速要求信號CACHERQ之接收,此 信號在圖10的前後中使用,以確認正在執行指令不離開快 速RAM範圍,並且需被執行在RAM或ROM範圍外。因此,快 速要求CACHERQ信號,指示不能執行指令在快速記憶體94 範圃外。産生資料要求信號DATARQ,僳當成一傾解碼一個 指令所需RAM存取的結果(例如,載入位元組,載入字組指 令)。此外,仲裁遍輯310接收一個畫蹰要求信號PLTRQ, 利用畫圖控制器200¾應於一値耋圖命令的解碼所産生者 〇 仲裁邏輯310只能致能(如所示,利用一個狀態暫存器 暫停模式位元是在w 狀態),係笛瑪琍歐晶Η正在執行 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝· 訂' 線· 本紙張尺度逍用中國Β家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公史) 80 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印¾ 314588 Λ (j _ Β 6 _____ 五、發明説明(8 1) 時,與當瑪琍歐擁有者位元設定時〇/在快速要求’ 35 # $ 求,及畫園要求信號,門閂32 5, 327舆329後,産生CRQ、 DRQ與PRQ信號。閛331、333與335,從鏑別的門@非反向 输出,接收逭些倍號。並且對這些信號建立優失順序。在 這方面,快速要求信號具有最高優$,資料要求第二最高 優失,畫圏要求信號具有最低優失。快速要求信號指定成 最高優先,因為它指示企圓執行快速記億朦範圍外指令· 並且它痛從RAM存取此指令。操作閘電路3 3 3與3 3 5,確保 一偁較低優失要求不設定門閂3 39與341,如果一個較高優 失要求已設定它的悃別的門閂。只有當条統不在暫停模式1 ,才能設定門閂337, 339, 341,因為暫輿棋式信號輪人 到每個閘331, 333, 335。暫停棋式信號將設定在一個低 邏輯準位狀態,當瑪琍歐擁有者,亦邸自由存取於RAM時 。酋任何確認門閂337, 339及341已經在* 1"(亦卽’一 傾遇期正在進行中),假如暫停設定為*丨",則不能設定 門閂337 , 339及341。閘33 1, 333和335建立RAM存取的® 先。如果快速要求門閂337設定,則將不設定資料確認門 閂3 3 9。如果快速或資料要求門閂設定,則也不設定盡® 確認門閂3 4 1。 門閂337利用快速要求信號設定,立即産生快速11認 信號CACK,並且立即利用如圖1〇所示邏輯電路建立可用的 快速94(或RAM)。産生資料確認倍號DACK與耋圖要求確認 信號PACK,以確認資料要求與畫圖要求信號,如果是圖所 示邏輯電路決定RAM是不忙。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項*填寫本頁) 裝. 本紙張尺度逍用中B a家«準(CNS)甲4規格(210父297公嗲) 81 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消t合作社印製 五、發明説明(β 2) 門閂3 3 7 , 3 3 9和3 4 1的非反相输出,網合到閘電路 343, 像依序經NOR閘344重置格雷計數器3 45,産生用於 RAM存取之時序信號。該行業專業人士均知道,格雷計數 器是在一個時間只有一値输出位元改變之計數器,可方便 地使用於控制RAM存取時間。 利用時序信號産生器312産生的完成信號,利用NOR閘 344, 與門閂337, 339, 341而接收。完成信號指示完成一 値RAM遇期。完成信號的産生,觸發仲裁邏輯310淸除適當 門閂,以淸除已門閂之要求。完成信號亦網合到原始電路 ,亦即,快速控制器68或畫圖控制器52,俥指示已完成 RAM存取。 根據本發明另一個可選擇的實施例。瑪琍歐晶片使用 一艏雙時鐘信號条统。因此,瑪琍歐晶片處理器,與上述 RAM控制器電路不需利用相同時鐘信號驅動。RAM控制器 88也許,例如,利用從超级NES所接收21MHZ時鐘信號驅動 ,並且利用其它可變頻率時鐘信號驅動瑪荆歐晶Η處理器 。於此方式,瑪琍歐晶片處理器將不受限制於21 ΜΗΖ時鐘 信號速率之操作。 根據本實施例之瑪琍歐晶片,也許使用一個非同步狀 態機械控制電路,如圖11所示,使用於執行一艏再同步雙 時鐘信號界面功能。圖11電路用於和瑪荆歐晶片處理器界 面,如果是用一個不同於記億匾控制器操作之時鐘信號条 統實施時。 如圖11所示之再同步電路,接收一値輸入時鐘信號 本紙張尺度边用中國Β家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公ΐ) 8 2 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝· 訂_ 線. 214588 λγ, ___ Η 6_ 五、發明説明今3 ) DIN,此信號不同步於一傾時鐮信號CK。再同步電路從 DIN産生一艏信號,此IDN同步於CK,不管是否DIN頻率高 於或低於時鐘信號速率CK。 如圏12所示實施例,響應於信號DIN,如圖11所電路 。從狀態010, 110, 100, 101, 111轉換並回到起始狀態 010。_11再同步電路用於任何界面接收雙時鐘信號,例 如ROM控制器104和RAM控制器88。 如圏11所示電路鬱臁於输入信號DIN,因此交換從空 間或重置狀態'' 010〃以形成狀態a 110",像由於利用關 F設定門閂A。只是再同步時鐘信號C1(走慢,也許已經是 真,則利用閘E重置門閂B形成狀態w 1 0 0 〃。當時鐘信 號再走高,則設定門閂C利用閘A形成狀態> 1 0 1 〃。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消贽合作杜印製 門閂C從電路産生輪出,如圖11在Q所示者。當输入 信號再走低,門閂B再次利用閘C設定形成狀態〜' 1 1 1 〃 。當到逹狀態"111"後,時鐘信號CK再走低,然後利用 閘G重置門閂A,以形成狀態011。此後,時鐘信號CK再走 高,並且利用閘重置門閂C,返回到狀態機械的空閒狀態 〇 圓13所示係圖4B ROM控制器104之進一步詳細圖。 ROM控制器104包括一個快速載人器400,其控制載人儲存 在R0M10與卡匣RAM内,目前正執行程式指令到瑪琍歐晶片 快速RAM94中。載人到快速RAM94指令以16-位元組為一群 。當遇上一掴跳躍指令,於16位元組段的中間,一個完全 16位元組段需曲鑛填入,在跳躍執行之前。快速載入電路 81. 6. 10,000張(H) 本紙5艮尺度边用中國B家標準(CNS) T4規格(210x297公:¢) 83 Λ 6 Η 6 214588 五、發明説明(84) 400,包括一個2位元狀態機,像馨應於跳躍指令的解碼, 因此確保16位元組快速段的其餘位元組載入快速RAM94中 。快速載入邏輯狀態機的第一狀態是空聞狀態,其將是真 ,如果程式執行在快速記億體的範圃外,或如果程式資料 已載入到快速記億體中時。第二狀態指示,於同時發生從 卡匣ROM或RAM中,載入快速記億體和執行程式。利用跳躍 指令的解碼觸發第三狀態,其狀態仍然有效,直到16位元 組快速段的所有位元組已載入為止。第四狀態遭遇,當執 行一個跳躍時,此跳躍到不精確此相闋於一镧快速16位元 組邊界的位址上。於此狀況中,此快速記憶體《入,從邊 界的開始,到程式跳躍的部份16位元段相關位址。 如圈4B所示快速控制器68,其産生一攔快速信號,輸 人到快速載入器400。並且指示所要求指令不出現在快速 RAM94中。因此,指令需從ROM中抓取。碼組信號識別將被 存取位址的最高三位元。並且指示是否將被存取程式ROM 或RAH。快速載入器400亦包括一個計數器(未顯示),其在 程式執行期間,維持相鼸於程式計數器PC的最低位元之計 數。此計數器載入經快速載入器400的PC输入。 在R0C控制器104的快速載龙電路400,亦接收等待與 >,. 執行控制信號。其指示瑪琍歐處器不論任何理由保持在等 待狀態,與瑪琍歐晶片是在w執行中"模式。於此環境下 ,快速載入電路400産生一個程式碼抓取控制倍號,如圖 13所示網合到H0R閘408,依縞合到ROM時序計數器406的清 除輸入。當快速載入電路40 0産生一個程式碼抓取信號, (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再埙寫本頁) 裝· 線. 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製 本紙張尺度遑用中S Η家標準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公兮) 84 214538 Λ β Π 6 經濟部屮央標準局KX工消价合作社印^ 五、發明説明8(5 ) 在ROM控制器104内的邏輯電路,起始一鏟高於資料抓取的 優失之程式碼抓取,此時和程式碼抓取起始先於資料抓取 Ί' ! 。仲裁電路配合優先運輯,如圖ίο所示,也許使用於致能 此産生信號,此信號所給的優先高於資料抓取者。 當從ROM時序計數器406移除清除信號時起始一艏計數 遇期。ROM時序計數器406用於産生R0MRDY時序信號,偽指 示ROM資料在ROM資料脚可用者,其信號是從閘電路410輸 出。 此ROM資料準備信號R0MRDY閛,銷合到再同步電路402, 其也許,例如,包含如圖11所示再同步電路。於處理器時 鐘信號獲得同步後,産生信號ROM DCK重置門閂404,並且 産生一個資料抓取信號,指示一値資料抓取,其利用暫存 器R14的存取所觸發者,因此獲得EN-R14信號。當ROM時序 計數器406到逹一傾預先決定之計數,産生資料抓取信號, 以確保資料在ROM資料脚是可用的。 團13所示ROM控制器,産生一値ROM位址從多工器414 輸出,並從下列輸入之一選擇位址資訊。程式碼暫存器 412從超级NES資料匯流排載入,以定義將被執行瑪琍歐程 式碼之ROM程式組。程式組暫存器42,提供一傾23位元 ROM位址的8位元到多工器414。ROM位址的較低位元,偽 從程式計數器PC的内容獲得。當資料寫入到快速RAM中, 利用快速載入400産生從快速載入信號之較低4位元。無 論何時存取暫存器R14,從瑪琍歐一般暫存器R14的内容, 産生增加多工器414位址输入。 (請先間讀背而之注意事項#堝寫本 本紙張尺度逍用中a國家樣準(CNS)肀4規怙(210x297公釐) 81. 6.〗0,000張(H) 85 A 6 Β6 五、發明説明(8)6 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 暫存器R14的存取所得的資料抓取門閂404,産生一 _ 資料抓取信號,使用於一侮控制输入使得多工器414選擇 它的R14輪入。(並且從超级資料匯流排HD,載入資料組暫 存器416的内容)。資料組暫存器416,包含資料組的較高 位元,你相關於一掴R14抓取操作。 此外,資料抓取倍號I»合到閂4 0 8 ,將起始R 0 Μ時序計 數器406的計數,依序經閘410産生一侮ROM準備信號 R0MRDY。當産生R0MRDY信號時,來自ROM資料匯流排ROM D [ 7…0 ]之資料是可用的。 位址多工器414,亦從超级NES位址匯流排HA,接收一 個ROM位址。將選擇超级NES位址匯流排,依信號* ROM" 的狀態而定,並《合到多工器414控制輪入。w ROM 〃控制 信號,指示瑪琍歃ROM控制器,超级NES具有ROM位址匯流 排的控制。 在解碼一個跳踢指令後,位址多工器414進給程式計 數器,加上快速載入器400内計數器所産生的4個數低位 元。而允許快速段載入其餘16位元組,此載人在解碼跳躍 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印製 之前。 多工器422,提供ROM控制器104内資料路徑,從R0H資 料R 0 M D到瑪琍歐的目的匯流排Z。資料抓取信號利用門閂 404所産生,與利用ROM時計數406産生之R0MRDY信號,鍋 合到閘418以致能ROM緩衝區420的載入。從ROM資料匯流排 R0MD[7··· 0]之ROM資料,載人到ROM緩衝區4 2 0。/ 多工器422雄匾於一傾指令碼的解碼,以選擇一艢輸 86 本紙張尺度遑用中國國家樣毕(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公《) 2l^588 Λ 6 It 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明i ) 87 入。(例如,GET B利用暫存器R14的存取,觸發自動資料 抓取)。如果解碼程式碼抓取操作,ROM控制器104將網合 指令,到如圖15A所示瑪琍歐晶片的指令匯流排。如果解 碼一 MGET B指令,則儲存在暫存器402的位元組放置在Z 匯流排上。某些GET B指令操作包含在X匯流排上資料, 像經相藺輸入到多工器422,如圖13所示。然後嫌合到目 地Z匯流排的資料,被載入到瑪琍歐一般暫存器76之一。 如圈14所示之快速控制器進一步詳細説明。快速控制 器68包括一個標識門閂506。標識506,包括,例如,64摘 門閂以指示是否指令儲存在快速RAM94 (當實施在快速控制 器時,只為說明之目的而已)。 在標識門閂506之每艟64旗標,相對於儲存在快速 RAM94儲存之16位元資訊。指令載人快速RAM94,同時指令 從R0H或RAM執行。當執行一個跳躍指令,如上所述, RAM94經快速載人器400,載人16位元組段的其餘位元組, 相關於圍13所示R0H控制器104。直到載入這些其餘位元組 為止,當載入經旗標識門閂506,其不能旗標整個16位元 組段。 敘及閘電路510,當程式計數器從0到15的計數,14 位元減法器502输出一偁範圍外的信號(其像反相),並且 當ROM控制器輸出其ROM資料準備信號R0MRDY(指示一個位 元組準備好輸出)時,閘電路510設定標識門閂506,其所 在位置的定址則利用解多工器5 0 4。/ (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙填窍本頁) 本紙張尺度遑用中β B家楳準(CNS) TM規格(210X297公*) 81. 7. 20,000張(II) 87 Λ 6 II 6 五、發明説明8令) 當解碼一傾快速指令,在匯流排501産生一僑控制信 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項洱塡寫本頁) 號,以指示從快速RAM記德鼸94有後縯指令執行。在匯流 排501上之控制信號,铒合到快速基底暫存器500載入输入 ,並且載入程式計數器PC的13較高位元於快速基底暫存器 500。同時,如圖14所示,清除識門閂506。 快速*底暫存器500的输出與程式計數器的較高位元( 例如位元3-15),耩合到減法器502,決定是否從程式計數 器PC的位址输人,於快速RAM94範困内。減法器502之輸出 ,例如,其6艏較低元,如快速RAM位址的較高位元,此 三較低位址位元從程式計數器PC鍋合。 自減法器502由一痼進位輸出信號,産生一個範圍外 信號0/RANGE,並且反相。當反相範圍外信號高時,以起 始門閂陣列506之一镧門閂的設定。門閂設定將依經解多 工器504從減法器502之快速位址輸出而定,並且相鬭於在 快速PAM94的一锢16位元組段,以指示一個指示儲存於快 速記憶鼸,其像相蘭於输出快速RAM位址。標識門閂506輸 出縞合到一傾多工器512,以網合64標識門閂信號之一, 經濟部中央櫺準局Μ工消#合作社印製 到N 0 R閘5 1 4 ,基於多工器選擇輸入以將輸出的一個門閂信 號,相對於從DEMUX504之64偁選擇輸出之一。其它需要一 備外部抓取,因為快速RAM94無法發現到所期望指令。 圖15A像圖4A中ALU控制器/指令解碼器606的方塊圖。 如圄15所示,ALU控制器/指令解碼器60,從快速RAM94, ROM控制器104與RAM控制器88接收指令。此瑪琍歐晶片組 件不是ALU /指令解碼器60的一部份,但圈15所示亦只是說 本紙張足度遑用中國國家«準(CNS)TM規格(210X2町公Λ) gg 81. 7. 20,000^(11) Μ 2145¾8 五、發明説嶢9() 明之目的。 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項存填寫本頁) 多工器525蘧擇一籲指令輪出,經由快速RAM94, ROM 控制器104,或RAM控制器88。並且輸人此遵擇指令到平行 管道門閂527。利用多工器525在RAM或ROM基指令間選擇, 依程式碼組暫存器,亦邸位元4,的預定位元狀應而定。 因此,依所載入到程式碼組暫存器之位址資訊,將解碼 ROM或RAM之指令。S —可選擇之多工器525從快速RAM94選 擇一傾指令,依快速控制器68之一館控制信嫌CACHE CTC 的狀態而定,指示在快速RAM94範圍内之一傾指令將被執 行,並且設定一傾適當標雜位元,相醑連於快速控制器68。 平行管道門閂527,自多工器525接收一齒8位元指令 ,當利用一鏑程式計數器致能信諕PCEN.IL. IH時,如果從 R0H(或RAM)正在抓取一值指令,則利用R〇M控制器104(或 RAM控制器88)産生此致能信號。因為從RAM或ROM抓取一備 指令,所費時間超過一镛處理遇期,因此,利用R0M或RAM 控制104, 88所産生之程式計數器致能倍號PCEN,以解觸 發指令解碼操作。 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 另一方面,假如所執行指令在快速RAM94範園外,則 所有時間程式計數器致能倍» PgEN是活性的,並且在全處 理器時鐘信號速率執行指令。因為存取時間慢於快 速RAM或卡匣RAM存取時間。必餺所産生PCEN倍號對ROM存 取的頻率間隔,低於相關快速RAM或動態或靜態RAM解碼致 能信號。 於平行管道門閂527所暫存皤時儲存之指令,輪出到 λΛΛΛ/ΙϋΛ tee 3fi#^(CNS)T4«ffi(21〇x297^*) 8 9 81. 7. 20,000張(丨丨)2I45BB Λ 6 Η 6 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (79) The bus HD loads data and can be accessed by the main CPU. These registers, as shown in Figure 9, do not need to be implemented in the RAM controller 88 itself, but rather its content network is integrated into the RAM controller. The data set register 314 may be, for example, as described below in the ROM controller 104, and the screen scratchpad may, for example, be implemented in the graphics hardware 52. The multiplexer 308 input signal is selected as follows. If the code confirmation signal CACK is generated, the code group and the program counter PC are selected. If the data confirmation signal DACK is generated, then select the data group and add the multiplexer register input. If the Pkuto confirmation signal PACK appears, select the map address. Finally, if no CACK, DACK, or PACK appears, select the main (also, SNES) address input. The 20-bit address output of the multiplexer 308 is coupled to the chronograph signal generator 312, and these address signals are meshed with the RAM 6 and 8 at the appropriate time. The billion-volume timing signal generator 312 receives the round-off from the Gray counter of the arbitration block 310. The mega signal timing signal generator 312 decodes the output from the Gray counter and generates the output signal for the address RAMs 6 and 8 via the RAM address bus RAMA as shown in MN1. In another way, the timing signal generator 312 will generate control signals for accessing RAM 6, 8 including row address strobe RAS, column address strobe CAS, and write enable WE signal, as shown in Figure 1. . The semaphore timing signal generator 312 generates a slap DONE signal, like returning to the arbitration logic 310, to indicate the completion of the RAM cycle. The chronograph number generator 3 1 2 of Yiming also generates a data latch signal D A T L A T which latches data from the external RAM into the data latch of the RAM controller 88 (not shown). From RAM data and then, for example, RAMD-IN, Strontium to Ma via RAM data bus-This paper is used in the standard Η Η home standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 public goods) (please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again) Installation · Line · 214588 66 Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention 6 Ο) Yeou Chip Circuit. The RAMA address signal output from the timing signal generator 312 is netted to any static RAM on the game cartridge. If the dynamic RAM is used on the playing machine cassette, the control signals CES, RAS and WE are generated. The structure of Emma Ou Jing H generates the static or dynamic RAM signals as appropriate, as indicated by the optional resistor settings described above. As shown in Xinjiang 9A, the exemplary timing signal generated by the timing signal generator 312 and other related signals are used. The data values and example addresses as described are for illustrative purposes only. Figure 8C shows the RAM DONE signal. The arbitration logic 310 is used in part to control the generation of RAM access signals at appropriate times. As shown in FIG. 10, the arbitration pass 310 receives the input of the billion-element access signal in response to the signal CACHE request CACHERQ, the data request DAT, RQ, and the graph request PLTRQ. Each of these input signals is temporarily stored in the latch 32, 327, 329. If the Imaho command is executed outside the range of RAM or ROM, the program starts with the reception of a fast request signal CACHERQ, which is used in the front and back of Figure 10 to confirm that the executing instruction does not leave the fast RAM range , And need to be executed outside the scope of RAM or ROM. Therefore, the CACHERQ signal is requested quickly, indicating that the instruction cannot be executed outside the flash memory 94. The data request signal DATARQ is generated as a result of the RAM access required to decode a command (for example, load byte, load byte command). In addition, the arbitration pass 310 receives a drawing request signal PLTRQ, and uses the drawing controller 200 to respond to the generator of the decoding of a drawing command. Arbitration logic 310 can only be enabled (as shown, using a status register The pause mode bit is in the state of w), which is being implemented by Dima Liou Jing Jing (please read the precautions before filling in this page). Install · Order 'Line · This paper standard uses the Chinese standard (CNS) ) A4 specifications (210X297 official history) 80 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 314 588 Λ (j _ Β 6 _____ Fifth, the description of the invention (8 1), and when the owner of the Maliou is set 〇 / In the quick request '35 # $ Seeking, and the painting garden request signal, after the latch 32, 327 and 329, CRQ, DRQ and PRQ signals are generated. 331, 333 and 335, from other gates @ 非 逆Output, receive some multiples, and establish the order of preference for these signals. In this regard, the fast request signal has the highest preference $, the data request the second highest preference, and the drawing requires the signal to have the lowest preference. The fast request signal specification Become the highest priority because it instructs Qiyuan to execute fast Shorthand the instruction outside the range of 100 million and it painfully accesses this instruction from RAM. Operate the brake circuit 3 3 3 and 3 3 5 to ensure that a lower pros and cons is not required. Latches 3 39 and 341 are not set, if a higher pros and cons It is required to set its other latch. Only when the system is not in the pause mode 1, the latch 337, 339, 341 can be set, because the temporary chess signal turns to each gate 331, 333, 335. The chess signal is suspended It will be set to a low logic level state, when the Malyu owner, also has free access to the RAM. The chieftain confirms that the latches 337, 339 and 341 are already in * 1 " Middle), if the pause is set to * 丨 ", the latches 337, 339, and 341 cannot be set. Gates 33, 333, and 335 create RAM access first. If the latch 337 setting is requested quickly, data confirmation will not be set Latch 3 3 9. If the quick or data request latch setting, it is not set. Confirm the latch 3 4 1. The latch 337 uses the quick request signal setting, immediately generates a quick 11 recognition signal CACK, and immediately uses as shown in Figure 10 Logic circuit builds available fast 94 (or RAM) . Generate data confirmation multiple DACK and drawing request confirmation signal PACK to confirm the data request and drawing request signal. If the logic circuit shown in the figure determines that the RAM is not busy. (Please read the notes on the back * fill in this page) Packed. This paper is used in the “Bai Family” quasi (CNS) A 4 specifications (210 father, 297 male) 81 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 Printed by the Beigongxiaot Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of invention (β 2) The non-inverted outputs of the latches 3 3 7, 3 3 9 and 3 4 1 are meshed to the gate circuit 343, like resetting the Gray counter 3 45 through the NOR gate 344 in sequence, generating timing signals for RAM access . Professionals in the industry know that Gray counters are counters that change only one output bit at a time, and can be conveniently used to control RAM access time. The completion signal generated by the timing signal generator 312 is received by the NOR gate 344, and the latches 337, 339, 341. The completion signal indicates completion of a RAM session. When the completion signal is generated, the arbitration logic 310 is triggered to remove the appropriate latch to remove the requirement of the latch. The completion signal is also networked to the original circuit, that is, the fast controller 68 or the drawing controller 52, indicating that the RAM access has been completed. According to another alternative embodiment of the invention. The Maliou chip uses a dual clock signal system. Therefore, the Maliou chip processor does not need to be driven by the same clock signal as the above RAM controller circuit. The RAM controller 88 may, for example, be driven by a 21 MHz clock signal received from the Super NES, and use other variable frequency clock signals to drive the Majestic OH processor. In this way, the Maliu chip processor will not be limited to the operation of the 21 MHz clock signal rate. According to the Marauer chip of this embodiment, a non-synchronized mechanical control circuit may be used, as shown in FIG. 11, for performing a clock resynchronization dual clock signal interface function. The circuit in Figure 11 is used in the interface with the Majino chip processor, if it is implemented with a clock signal system that is different from the operation of the memory controller. As shown in Figure 11, the resynchronization circuit receives an input clock signal. The paper standard uses the Chinese Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297) 8 2 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Binding · Binding _ Line. 214588 λγ, ___ Η 6_ V. Description of the Invention 3) DIN, this signal is not synchronized with the tilt signal CK. The resynchronization circuit generates a bow signal from DIN. This IDN is synchronized with CK, regardless of whether the DIN frequency is higher or lower than the clock signal rate CK. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, in response to the signal DIN, the circuit shown in FIG. 11 is shown. Transition from state 010, 110, 100, 101, 111 and return to the initial state 010. The _11 resynchronization circuit is used to receive dual clock signals at any interface, such as ROM controller 104 and RAM controller 88. As shown in Figure 11, the circuit is embarrassed by the input signal DIN, so swap from space or reset state "010" to form the state a 110 ", as the latch A is set by using F. Just resynchronize the clock signal C1 (slow, maybe it is already true, then use the gate E to reset the latch B to form the state w 1 0 0 〃. When the clock signal goes high again, set the latch C to use the gate A to form the state> 1 0 1 〃. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standardization, Beigong Xiaozhi cooperated to print the latch C from the circuit, as shown in Q of Figure 11. When the input signal goes low again, latch B is again set to form the state using gate C ~ ' 1 1 1 〃 After reaching the state "111", the clock signal CK goes low again, and then the gate G is used to reset the latch A to form the state 011. After that, the clock signal CK goes high again, and the gate is used to reset the latch C , Return to the idle state of the state machine. Circle 13 is a further detailed diagram of the ROM controller 104 of FIG. 4B. The ROM controller 104 includes a fast manned device 400, which controls the manned storage in the ROM 10 and the cassette RAM, Currently executing program instructions into the Maruio chip fast RAM94. Manned to fast RAM94 instructions are grouped in 16-byte groups. When a slap jump instruction is encountered, in the middle of the 16-byte segment, a full 16-bit The tuple section needs to be filled with bent ore, Before. Fast loading circuit 81. 6. 10,000 sheets (H) The original size of the paper is 5 Chinese standard (CNS) T4 specifications (210x297 g: ¢) 83 Λ 6 Η 6 214588 V. Description of the invention (84) 400 , Including a 2-bit state machine, like Xin Ying should decode the jump instruction, so ensure that the remaining bytes of the 16-byte fast segment are loaded into the fast RAM94. The first state of the fast loading logic state machine is unheard of Status, it will be true if the program is executed outside the scope of the fast memory, or if the program data has been loaded into the fast memory. The second status indicates that it will occur simultaneously from the cartridge ROM or RAM , Load the fast memory and execute the program. Use the decoding of the jump instruction to trigger the third state, which is still valid until all the bytes of the 16-byte fast segment have been loaded. The fourth state encounters when executed During a jump, the jump to the inaccurate phase is at the address of a lanthanum fast 16-byte boundary. In this case, the fast memory "enters, from the beginning of the boundary, to the part of the program jump 16 The relevant address of the bit segment. Fast as shown in circle 4B The controller 68 generates a fast signal and inputs it to the fast loader 400. It also indicates that the requested instruction does not appear in the fast RAM 94. Therefore, the instruction needs to be fetched from the ROM. The code group signal identification will be accessed The highest three bits of the address. And indicates whether the program ROM or RAH will be accessed. The fast loader 400 also includes a counter (not shown), which maintains the lowest bit corresponding to the program counter PC during program execution The count of the element. This counter is loaded into the PC input via the fast loader 400. The fast load circuit 400 of the ROC controller 104 also receives the wait and execution control signal. It instructs the Maliou processor to remain in the waiting state for any reason, and the Maliou chip is in the "executing" mode. Under this environment, the fast loading circuit 400 generates a code grabbing control multiple, as shown in FIG. 13 meshed to the H0R gate 408, and then coupled to the clear input of the ROM timing counter 406. When the fast loading circuit 40 0 generates a code grab signal, (please read the precautions on the back before writing this page). Install and line. This paper is printed by the Cooperative Society of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. China National Standards (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297) 84 214538 Λ β Π 6 Printed by the KX Engineering Consumer Price Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ V. Description of Invention 8 (5) in the ROM controller 104 Logic circuit, start a shovel code capture that is higher than the data capture pros and cons, at this time and the code capture start precedes the data capture Ί '!. The arbitration circuit cooperates with the priority operation, as shown in Fig. Ο, and may be used to enable the generated signal, which is given a higher priority than the data grabber. When the clear signal is removed from the ROM timing counter 406, a head counting period is started. The ROM timing counter 406 is used to generate the ROMDYDY timing signal, which pseudo-indicates that ROM data is available at the ROM data pin, and its signal is output from the gate circuit 410. This ROM data preparation signal R0MRDY is pinned to the resynchronization circuit 402, which may, for example, include the resynchronization circuit shown in FIG. After the processor clock signal is synchronized, a signal ROM DCK is generated to reset the latch 404, and a data capture signal is generated to indicate a value data capture, which uses the trigger triggered by the access of the register R14, thus obtaining EN- R14 signal. When the ROM timing counter 406 reaches a predetermined count, a data capture signal is generated to ensure that the data is available at the ROM data pin. The ROM controller shown in Group 13 generates an ROM address output from the multiplexer 414, and selects address information from one of the following inputs. The code register 412 is loaded from the Super NES data bus to define the ROM program group that will be executed by the Malyo program code. The program group register 42 provides 8 bits of a 23-bit ROM address to the multiplexer 414. The lower bits of the ROM address are pseudo-obtained from the contents of the program counter PC. When data is written to the fast RAM, the fast load 400 is used to generate the lower 4 bits from the fast load signal. Regardless of when the scratchpad R14 is accessed, an additional multiplexer 414 address input is generated from the content of the Malacca general scratchpad R14. (Please read the back and the precautions in the first place. #The script book is used in the paper standard. A national standard (CNS) 4 standard (210x297 mm) 81. 6.〗 0,000 sheets (H) 85 A 6 Β6 5 、 Instructions for invention (8) 6 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The data capture latch 404 obtained by the access of the register R14 generates a data capture signal, which is used for a control input to make The multiplexer 414 selects its R14 round-robin. (And loads the contents of the data group register 416 from the super data bus HD). The data group register 416, which contains the higher bits of the data group, you are related to A slap R14 capture operation. In addition, the data capture multiple I »is latched to the latch 4 0 8, and the count of the initial R 0 M timing counter 406 is sequentially generated through the gate 410 to generate a ROM preparation signal R0MRDY. When the R0MRDY signal, the data from the ROM data bus ROM D [7… 0] is available. The address multiplexer 414 also receives a ROM address from the super NES address bus HA. The super NES bit will be selected The address bus depends on the state of the signal * ROM ", and is integrated into the multiplexer 414 control wheel. W ROM 〃 control signal , Instructs the Maru ROM controller, the Super NES has the control of the ROM address bus. After decoding a jump-and-kick instruction, the address multiplexer 414 feeds the program counter, plus the counter generated in the fast loader 400 The lower 4 bits of the number. While allowing the fast segment to be loaded into the remaining 16 bytes, this manned data is printed before being decoded by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau. , From R0H data R 0 MD to Mario ’s destination bus Z. The data capture signal is generated by the latch 404 and the R0MRDY signal generated by the count 406 when using the ROM. The pot is closed to the gate 418 to enable the ROM buffer 420 Loading. From the ROM data bus R0MD [7 ··· 0], ROM data is loaded into the ROM buffer 4 2 0. / The multiplexer 422 plaque decodes the command code to select an input. 86 The size of this paper is based on China National Sample (CNS) Grade 4 (210X297). 2l ^ 588 Λ 6 It 6 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of Invention i) 87%. (For example, GET B uses the access to the scratchpad R14 to trigger automatic data capture). If the code grabbing operation is decoded, the ROM controller 104 will mesh the command to the command bus of the Mario chip as shown in FIG. 15A. If a MGET B command is decoded, the bytes stored in the register 402 are placed on the Z bus. Some GET B command operations include data on the X bus, like input to the multiplexer 422 via phase matching, as shown in FIG. 13. Then, the data that fits into the destination Z bus is loaded into one of the Malyu general registers 76. The fast controller as shown in circle 14 is described in further detail. The quick controller 68 includes an identification latch 506. The flag 506 includes, for example, 64 to remove the latch to indicate whether the instruction is stored in the flash RAM 94 (when implemented in the flash controller, for illustration purposes only). The 64 flags per mark of the latch 506 are relative to the 16-bit information stored in the flash RAM 94. The instructions are loaded with fast RAM94, while the instructions are executed from R0H or RAM. When a jump instruction is executed, as described above, the RAM 94 carries the remaining bytes of the 16-byte segment via the fast manned device 400, which is related to the ROH controller 104 shown in FIG. Until these remaining bytes are loaded, when loading the flag flag latch 506, it cannot flag the entire 16-byte segment. Describing the gate circuit 510, when the program counter counts from 0 to 15, the 14-bit subtractor 502 outputs a signal outside the range (which is like an inversion), and when the ROM controller outputs its ROM data preparation signal R0MRDY When a byte is ready to be output), the gate circuit 510 sets the identification latch 506, and the address of its location uses the demultiplexer 504. / (Please read the precautions to be filled out on this page by Sun Qiuqian first) This paper is used in the standard β B Family Standard (CNS) TM specification (210X297) * 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (II) 87 Λ 6 II 6 V. Description of the Invention 8 Orders) When decoding a fast dump command, an overseas Chinese control letter is generated at the bus 501 (please read the note on the back of Ercheng to write this page) number to instruct to remember Delu 94 from the fast RAM There are post-execution instructions. The control signal on the bus 501 is erbium coupled to the fast base register 500 to load input, and 13 higher bits of the program counter PC are loaded into the fast base register 500. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 14, the door latch 506 is cleared. The output of the fast * bottom register 500 and the higher bits of the program counter (for example, bits 3-15) are combined to the subtractor 502 to determine whether to input from the address of the program counter PC, within the fast RAM94 range . The output of the subtractor 502, for example, its lower 6 bits, such as the higher bit of the fast RAM address, these three lower address bits are combined from the program counter PC. The self-subtractor 502 generates a out-of-range signal from a binary carry signal, and generates an out-of-range signal 0 / RANGE, which is inverted. When the signal outside the inversion range is high, the setting of one of the lanthanum latches of the latch array 506 is started. The latch setting will depend on the output of the fast address from the subtractor 502 via the demultiplexer 504, and will be compared to a 16-byte segment in the fast PAM94 to indicate that an instruction is to be stored in the fast memory. The blue is used to output the fast RAM address. The identification latch 506 output is outputted to the tilt multiplexer 512, and one of the latch signals is identified by the meshing 64. The Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Μ 工 消 # Cooperative is printed to N 0 R gate 5 1 4 based on the multiplexer Select the input to output a latch signal relative to one of the 64 outputs selected from DEMUX504. Others require an external fetch, because the fast RAM 94 cannot find the desired instruction. FIG. 15A is a block diagram of the ALU controller / instruction decoder 606 in FIG. 4A. As shown in FIG. 15, the ALU controller / instruction decoder 60 receives instructions from the fast RAM 94, the ROM controller 104, and the RAM controller 88. This Maliou chip assembly is not part of the ALU / instruction decoder 60, but the circle 15 shows only that the paper fully uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) TM specification (210X2 Machi public) gg 81. 7. 20,000 ^ (11) Μ 2145¾8 5. The purpose of the invention is 9 (). (Please read the precautions and fill in this page first) The multiplexer 525 chooses one command to cycle through the fast RAM94, ROM controller 104, or RAM controller 88. And lose this to follow the instructions to the parallel pipe latch 527. The multiplexer 525 is used to select between RAM or ROM based instructions, depending on the predetermined bit shape of the program code register, also bit 4 ,. Therefore, the ROM or RAM commands will be decoded according to the address information loaded into the program code register. S — the optional multiplexer 525 selects a tilt command from the fast RAM 94, depending on the state of the control letter CACHE CTC of one hall of the fast controller 68, indicating that a tilt command within the range of the fast RAM 94 will be executed, and Set an appropriate inclination miscellaneous element and connect it to the fast controller 68. Parallel pipe latch 527, receiving a tooth 8-bit command from the multiplexer 525, when using a dysprosium program counter to enable the letter PCEN.IL. IH, if a value command is being fetched from R0H (or RAM), then The enable signal is generated by the ROM controller 104 (or the RAM controller 88). Because fetching a backup command from RAM or ROM takes more than a processing time, use R0M or RAM to control the program counters generated by 104, 88 to enable multiple PCEN to decode the command decoding operation. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. On the other hand, if the executed instruction is outside the fast RAM94 fan park, all time program counters are enabled. »PgEN is active and executes the instruction at the full processor clock signal . Because the access time is slower than the access time of fast RAM or cassette RAM. The frequency interval of the PCEN multiples generated by BB for accessing the ROM is lower than the relevant fast RAM or dynamic or static RAM decoding enable signal. The instructions stored when the parallel pipeline latch 527 is temporarily stored are rounded to λΛΛΛ / ΙϋΛ tee 3fi # ^ (CNS) T4 «ffi (21〇x297 ^ *) 8 9 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (丨 丨)

2145BB Λ 6 η 6 經濟部中央橾準局貝工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明9(° ) 傅統指令解碼電路,利用閘電路537, 539和541閘電路所 代表,以産生操作程式碼1,2...... Ν的信號指示。 載入到平行管道門閂5 2 7指令,亦網合於向前看邏輯 551。向前看(Look-ahead)邏輯551提供操作程式碼的一傕 預先解碼指示,係當成瑪琍歐晶Η暫存器方塊76,選擇適 當暫存器。因此,欲在解碼此蓮算碼之前最佳化執行速度 ,快速決定所需存取的暫存器,以致能指令所需資料的高 速存取。 向前看邏輯551,耱應於指令運算碼位元,與各種不 同程式解碼控制旗檫。指令解碼電路60包括程式控制旗標 檢測器邏輯543,其鬱應於先前所被解碼操作碼,以産生 ACT1和Α0Τ2信號,指示如上述相關前置指令已被解碼。如 下所述相關ACT1 PRE信號,亦利用旗檫檢測器邏輯543産 生。此外,産生IL與ΙΗ信號,以指示已解碼指令所需立即 資料。(其中L和Η指示低位元組和高位元組)。ΙΗ與IL旗 檩預先排除此立即資料相開指令,被解碼成操成碼。因此 ,亦不需I L ( ΤΊΓ)和I Η ( ΤΤΓ)致能平行管道門閂5 2 7。如前所 述,ACT1與ACT2修改一摘後缠産生運算碼,並且輸人到解 碼邏輯5 3 7, 5 3 9, 5 4 1等。例如.在閘電路541根據先前討 論這些信號,修改輪出蓮算碼。 向前看邏輯551産生暫存器選擇,此信號基於預先解 碼的蓮算碼,與當先前操作解碼(例如,前置碼ACT1或 ACT2)所産生信號。例如,在程式控制旗標檢測邏輯543内 所示,如果利用解碼邏輯545解碼ACT1信號,産生一個 本紙ft尺度逍用中困《家《準(CNS)T4規格(210X297公;¢) 81. 7. 20,000張(II) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再塡寫本頁) 21.4588 Μ 經濟部中央標準局只工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明?1) ACTl PRE信號,其中利用程式控制旗標檢測器酱輯5 43輸 出信號,並且信號依序經OR閘549網合到向前看纽輯531。 ACT1 PRE信號亦設定ACT1門閂547。OR閘549亦從門閂547 输出ACT1信號,並且網合ACT1信號,並且縞合ACT1倍號到 解碼邏輯537,539,541等。/ 圖15示意地代表向前看遢輯,說明如何産生4値暫存 器選擇控制位元XSELO、 XSEL1、 XSEL2、及XSEL3。然後這 4個控制位元,縝合到所述多工器6 2 0與6 2 2 ,相鼷連於團 17暫存器控制邏輯76,蘧擇16傾暫存器之一的内容,並輪 出到X匯流排被一個執行中指令所使用。 因此,一傾指令在載入到平行管道527之前,铒合到 向前看解解邏輯元素529 ,産生一傾暫存器灌擇位元XSEL- 冬0,依序地,門閂在門閂535中,然後當成信號XSEL0輪出 £.1 。利用程式計數器信號PCEN致能門閂535。類似地,邐輯 霣路531産生XSEL-U1,被門閂在門閂533中,當成信號 XSEL1输出。ALT1 PRE倍號縞合到各種不同解碼邏輯電路 529, 53 1等在此向前看邏輯551。並且用於定義利用暫存 器控制邏輯76所選擇之適當暫存器。例如,如向前看電路 551所示,ACT1 PRE信號縝合到邏輯電路531信號之一,産 生XSEL-U1,被閂在門閂553,依序输出信號XSEL1。 圖15B所示範例時序信號,像用於證明向前看遡輯 551的操作。圖15B中,一偁時鐘信號CK,和一鏑範例指令 蓮算碼相鬭於快速RAM資料存取。所示時序信號亦指示當 載入平行管道門閂527時,當執行指令解碼操作時。當産 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度遠用中家«率(CNS)T4規格(210 X 297公《:> g j 81 · 7. 20,000張(||) 2145882145BB Λ 6 η 6 Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Industry and Commerce, Beigong Consumer Cooperative V. Description of invention 9 (°) Futong command decoding circuit, represented by gate circuits 537, 539 and 541, to generate operation code 1 , 2 ... N signal indication. The 5 2 7 instruction loaded into the parallel pipe latch is also integrated into the look-ahead logic 551. Looking forward (Look-ahead) logic 551 provides a pre-decode instruction of the operation code, which is regarded as the Malioujing H register block 76, and the appropriate register is selected. Therefore, to optimize the execution speed before decoding the lotus code, quickly determine the register to be accessed, so as to enable high-speed access to the required data. Looking ahead at the logic 551, it corresponds to the instruction operation code bit and decodes the control flag with various different programs. The instruction decoding circuit 60 includes program control flag detector logic 543, which responds to the previously decoded opcode to generate ACT1 and AOT2 signals, indicating that the relevant pre-instructions have been decoded as described above. The related ACT1 PRE signal is also generated using the sassafras detector logic 543 as described below. In addition, IL and IH signals are generated to indicate the immediate data required for the decoded instruction. (Where L and Η indicate low byte and high byte). The ΙΗ and IL flags pre-exclude this immediate data open command and are decoded into codes. Therefore, I L (ΤΊΓ) and I Η (ΤΤΓ) are not required to enable the parallel pipe latch 5 2 7. As mentioned before, ACT1 and ACT2 are modified after picking to generate the operation code, and input to the decoding logic 5 3 7, 5 3 9, 5 4 1, etc. For example, the gate circuit 541 modifies the round lot code based on these signals previously discussed. Looking forward, the logic 551 generates the register selection. This signal is based on the pre-decoded lotus code and the signal generated when the previous operation was decoded (e.g., the preamble ACT1 or ACT2). For example, as shown in the program control flag detection logic 543, if the decoding logic 545 is used to decode the ACT1 signal, a paper-based ft scale is used. The "Home" standard (CNS) T4 specification (210X297 public; ¢) 81.7 . 20,000 sheets (II) (please read the precautions before writing this page) 21.4588 Μ Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives. 5. Invention Instructions? 1) ACTl PRE signal, which uses the program to control the flag The signal output of the standard detector series 5 43 is output, and the signals are sequentially connected to the forward looking series 531 via the OR gate 549 network. The ACT1 PRE signal also sets the ACT1 latch 547. The OR gate 549 also outputs the ACT1 signal from the latch 547, and the ACT1 signal is meshed, and the ACT1 multiple number is combined to the decoding logic 537, 539, 541, etc. / Fig. 15 schematically represents a look forward to the album, showing how to generate 4-value register selection control bits XSELO, XSEL1, XSEL2, and XSEL3. Then these 4 control bits are coupled to the multiplexers 6 2 0 and 6 2 2, which are connected to the control logic 76 of the 17th register, select the content of one of the 16th register, and Round-trip to X bus is used by an executing instruction. Therefore, before being loaded into the parallel pipeline 527, the one-tilt instruction erbium is combined with the forward-looking logic element 529, which generates a one-tilt register to fill the select bit XSEL- Dong 0. In sequence, the latch is in the latch 535 , And then as a signal XSEL0 round out £ .1. The latch 535 is enabled using the program counter signal PCEN. Similarly, the Xuanlu 531 generates XSEL-U1, which is latched in the latch 533, and output as the signal XSEL1. The ALT1 PRE multiples are combined into various decode logic circuits 529, 531, etc. Looking ahead at logic 551 here. And it is used to define the appropriate register selected by the register control logic 76. For example, as shown in the forward-looking circuit 551, the ACT1 PRE signal is coupled to one of the logic circuit 531 signals, generates XSEL-U1, is latched on the latch 553, and sequentially outputs the signal XSEL1. The example timing signal shown in FIG. 15B is used to prove the operation of the forward looking 551. In FIG. 15B, a clock signal CK and a dysprosium example instruction code are used for fast RAM data access. The timing signal shown also indicates when the parallel pipeline latch 527 is loaded, when the instruction decoding operation is performed. When produced (please read the precautions before filling in this page) The paper size is far away from the home use «Rate (CNS) T4 specification (210 X 297 gm":> gj 81 · 7. 20,000 sheets (||) 214588

66 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明(92) 生暫存器選擇信號時,以及笛從暫存器資訊載入在於目地 Z匯流排上。 如團15B所示,快速RAM資料運算碼蓮算碼1)成為有效 ,像在某些點上於時鐘信號脈衝CK的上昇邊緣後時間。儲 存運算碼在平行管道門閂527,直到,例如,第二時鐘信 铖脈衝的下降邊緣,此時運算碼2載入到門閂527。指令 解碼器60開始解碼相期於蓮算碼1之指令,於剛接收從門 閂227的輪出,其時間如圈18所示意。指令解碼的結果將 如上述,適當地網合控制信號到瑪琍歐組件,例如ALU50, 快速控制器68,與畫圏硬體52等。 如圖15所示向前看電路551,在運算碼52的解碼之前 時間點,利用産生一健信號XSEL-U開始此暫存器遘擇解碼 程序。在被閂到門閂535之前,XSEL-ϋΟ信號代表解瑪邏輯 529的输出。利用門閂535输出XSEL-0信號,在此時間黏, 對於令所需資料於指令執行週期内,儘可能及早存取,更 快的縞合到睡當匯流排。 如匾16所示一部份的暫存器控制邏輯78,係用於産生 Y和Z匯流排相鬭暫存器選擇信號。多工器604遴擇從Z 匯流排寫到16値暫存器的那一値。多工器606選擇那一偁 暫存器進給Y匯流排。 多工器604舆606從4位元暫存器600與602接收输入。 使用暫存器600與602以實施上述w T0 〃及* FROM"前置指 令。利用” T0 "及” FROM "前置的解碼致能暫存器60 0與 602,以操作網合指令匯流排的較低位元,到暫存器600和 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#塡寫本頁) ,Γ"66 Du Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperation of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the Invention (92) When the register selection signal is generated, and the information from the register is loaded on the Z bus. As shown in group 15B, the fast RAM data operation code lotus code 1) becomes effective, like at some point after the rising edge of the clock signal pulse CK. The opcode is stored in the parallel pipe latch 527 until, for example, the falling edge of the second clock signal pulse, at which time opcode 2 is loaded into the latch 527. The instruction decoder 60 starts to decode the instruction with the phase 1 of the lotus code, and it just receives the round from the latch 227, the time of which is indicated by circle 18. The result of the instruction decoding will be as described above, and the control signal will be appropriately meshed to the Malio components, such as ALU50, fast controller 68, and picture hardware 52, etc. Looking ahead at the circuit 551 as shown in FIG. 15, at the time point before the decoding of the operation code 52, this temporary register selection decoding process is started by generating a healthy signal XSEL-U. Before being latched to the door latch 535, the XSEL-ϋΟ signal represents the output of the decode logic 529. Use the latch 535 to output the XSEL-0 signal. At this time, the required data can be accessed as early as possible during the instruction execution cycle, and it can be quickly integrated into the sleep bus. As shown in plaque 16, a part of the register control logic 78 is used to generate Y and Z bus phase register selection signals. The multiplexer 604 selects the value written from the Z bus to the 16-value register. The multiplexer 606 selects the buffer to feed the Y bus. Multiplexers 604 and 606 receive input from 4-bit registers 600 and 602. The registers 600 and 602 are used to implement the aforementioned w T0 〃 and * FROM " pre-commands. Use the "T0" and "FROM" pre-decoding enable registers 60 0 and 602 to operate the lower bits of the network instruction bus to the register 600 and (please read the opposite first Matters needing attention # 塡 write this page), Γ "

T 象 本紙张尺度遴用中β困家樣準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公*) 92 .7. 20,000張(Η) 21.4538 Λ 6 Π 6 經濟部中央標準局Μ工消#合作杜印製 五、發明説明參3 ) 602。淸除暫存器600與602,以響應於一個指令,如上述 之重置控制旗樣。 此外,多工器604與606從在暫存器方塊76之不同暫存 器接收输入。多工器604, 606從指令匯流排上較低位元接 收輸入,以實施指令的較低4位元,定義指令目地或來源 暫存器。此外,從超级NES位址匯流排之預先決定較低位 元,縝合到多工器604與606,俾提供超级HES存取到此暫 存器組。多工器6 0 4與6 06選擇暫存器進給Ζ和Υ匯流排。 圈17顯示暫存器方塊76,和實施在圖4Β内暫存器控制 邏輯78的增加暫存器選擇控制邏輯。設定FR0MX暫存器618 ,利用解碼一倨FROM指令所産生的一餹FR0MSET信號。在 接收FRO MSET信號後,Y匯流排的内容載入到暫存器618。 載入在暫存器618之資料,則成為用於後缠指令執行的資 料。暫存器618的内容,供合成輪入之一到多工器622。多 工器622亦接收R0暫存器的内容,(其係用一個預設暫存器 ),當成它的输入之一。 多工器622另一傾输入是多工器620的輸入。多工器 620接收程式計數器的内容输入(亦即暫存器R15),從使用 在執行MERGE指令暫存器輸人,與暫存器R1 (例如,用於執 行此畫圖指令)。多工器620選擇此輸入之一,基於利用如 靨15A所示向前看遷輯551,而産生XSEL2與XSEL3位元的狀 態。 多工器622—傾增加輸入,網合到Y匯流排的内容, 以放置相同資料於X匯流排上,如在Y匯流排上。如前所 本紙张尺度逍用中β國家楳準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公;¢) 9 3 81. 7. 20,000張(II) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再堝寫本頁) 214588 λ 6 __Η6 五、發明説明?4) 述,到多工器622S —傾輸入,像如上述FROM X暫存器618 的输出。選擇多工器622的輸出,像基於在所産生 XSEL0與XSEL1位元的狀態,並且鍚合到X匯流排。 在上述說明相鼷許多暫存器〜R15之特別目地功能, 於此將不再重覆。暫存器〜R3的输出播合到多工器608, 暫存器R4〜R7的输出縝合到多工器610,暫存器R8, R11的 輪出縝合到多工器612,暫存器R12〜R15的輸出網合到多 工器614。到多工器608, 610, 612和614之4籲舾別输入 之一,利用YSEL1與YSEL0位元選擇,如_16所示從多工器 606输出。從多工器608, 610, 612和614输出,依序输入 到多工器616。到多工器616之4侮輪入之一的鏖擇,傜基 於如圖16從多工器606的YSEL2與YSEL3位元输出的狀態。 多工器616的输出縞合到缓衝區暫存器617,其輸出依序锅 合到Y匯流排。 經濟部中央標準局3工消费合作社印製 參考暫存器R0到R15输入,每健暫存器具有致能输入, 利用如圖16所示所産生的ZSEL位元〇到3而選擇。每艏暫 存器亦有一個I時鐘信號輸入CK,與一個資料輸入Data-in, 於適當緩衝後,經此從Z匯流排接收資料。 暫存器124,偽用於相關於各種不同乘法操作,亦包 括除能低與除能高位元輪入,以及致能低與致能高位元输 入。暫存器R15,程式計數器PC,從在圔13的ROM控制器之 快速載入器400,接收一值信號CCHCD,禁止一掴跳躍操作 ,直到目前16位元組快速段載入到快速RAM為止。此外, 程式計數器從指令解碼器,接收一侮程式循琛未定信號 81. 7. 20,000張(II) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙填寫本頁) 本紙»疋度遑用中《 B家搮準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公; 94 Λ 6 η 6 五、發明説明气5 ) LOOPEN,其指令應産生一傾跳躍操作,並且致能PC載入暫 存器R13的内容。此外,暫存器R15接收一倕開機重置信號 RESET,並且當執行一個循環指令時,一艟PN輸入使得程 式計數器載入暫存器R13的内容。 如上所述,本發明之繪圖共處理器組合於主電視遊樂 器糸統,利於使用産生不同的特殊效應,其中包括,例如 ,多邊形基目標的旋轉,放大,與/或縮小。圖18的範例 瑪琍歐晶片程式的一個流程圖,像用於畫出一掴梯形,描 述如何程式化瑪琍歐晶片,以産生被顯示的一部份多邊形 基目樣。說明産生此多邊形目標的瑪荆歐程式,將一起詳 細解釋瑪琍硬體如何執行此程式如下。 首先參照圖18所示流程圖的高層次,起初,某些在暫 存器方塊R1到R15的暫存器,係相關於産生梯形之變數。( 亦即,暫存器R1儲存像素X位置,暫存器R2儲存像素Y位 置線,暫存器R7儲存梯形高度等)。此後,如方塊650所示 ,設定一個循環計數器,並且計算起始像素值。 經濟部屮央標準局貞工消费合作社印製 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) 如方塊652所示,做一値檢査,以決定梯形水平線之 一的高度。假如線的開始點減去線的未端點的結果,是一 個負值(-VE),則此常式跳躍到方塊660。假如線開始點減 去線的末端點,是一傾正值,傜指示線的長度不超過,則 減低循環計數器(654),並且執行一傾畫圈像素指令,以 獲得適當像素的畫麵。 如方塊6 58所示,做一値檢査,以決定是否循環計數 器的内容為零。如果循琛計數器不是零,則執行一値跳躍 本紙» 尺度遍用中BH家«毕(CNS)甲 4 規格(210X297 公;it) 9 5 81. 7 . 20,000i|t (II) ^--- 五、發明説明A6 ) 回到方塊654,以減低循環計數器(654),並且畫出另一倨 像素(656 )。 如果循琛計數器等於零,則更新左多邊形邊X座樣, 與右多邊形邊X座樺(660)。以後,滅少梯形的Y高度 (662)。並且若結果不是零,則將跳回到方塊650(664)再 執行常式,並且增加Y座標,而移動到下一個掃描線(665 )。如果高度等於零,則將完全執行此常式,並且完成此 梯形(666)。 欲說明瑪琍歐晶片指令的使用産生縮圖,以用於畫出 —個梯形的範例程式,像圖18流程圖之實施例以次説明如 下。 :畫梯形循環 r X =1 ;耋X位置 rx =2 ;畫丫位置 rxl =3 ;最上左X位置 rxlinc =4 ;最上左x位置增加 rx2 = 5 ;最上右X位置 經濟部中央櫺準局员工消费合作社印製 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) r X 2 i n c =6 ;最上右χ位置增加 r d y = 7 ;梯形y高度 r 1 en =12 ;循琛計數,hline高度 γΙοορ =13 ;循琛標識 hi i n e s iwt rloop, hline2 ;設定 h 1 i n e 循環的開始 hi i n e 1 本紙Λ尺度逡用肀國《家«準(CNS) Ή規格(2丨0X297公;it) 96 81. 7. 20,000¾ (I!) Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部中央標準局貝工消f合作社印製 五、發明説明) n f r ο β r χ 1 蘿 t ο r χ η h i b fro» x r 2 i h i b in t o r 1 e n 雇 s u b r x ίο b m i h 1 i n e s 3 η η o p r l n c r 1 e n hi i n e s 2 m 1 ο o p «plot hi i n e s 3 通 w i t h r x 1 aiadd rxlinc a w i t h r x 2 b a d d r x 2 i n c a d e x r d y ;x= (rxl) >>8 » b n e hlinesl mine r y ;長度,rlen=(rx2>>8)-(rxl>>8) ;結果r 1 e n < 0則跳h 1 i n e ;經常畫一匍像素 :畫 h 1 i n e ;rxl + = rxl inc ;rx2+=rx2inc ;r d y - = 1 ;重覆r d y次 ;並且下完成 欲證明瑪琍歐硬體操作如何執行一傾程式,如下說明 上述梯形産生之程式。在執行梯形産生程式之前,主電腦 本紙»疋度逍用中《國家«準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公址) 81. 7. 20,000張(II) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝- 97 / 5¾¾ Π 6 _ Δ ^ _____—------ 五、發明説明次8 ) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項孙塡寫本頁) 条統,亦即,超级HES,直接寫到程式碼組暫存器,並且 進入銀幕畫面基底暫存器,如上所說明相期於圖5流程圖 之説明。此外,超级NES寫低位元組的XEQ位址,到ROM控 制器104的一健當地暫存器,從超级NES位址匯流排HA解碼 。然後超级NES寫高位組到ROM控制器104,結合當地暫存 器的内容,並耩合到Z匯流排。此後,致能當成瑪琍歐晶 片程式計數器的暫存器R15。 在檢測上述超级HES寫操作到ROM控制器104的後邊緣, 設定瑪琍歐w G0 〃旗標。假如程式計數器減掉快速基底暫 存器,大於快速記億體大小,或假如快速旗標倍於程式計 數器,減掉快速基底暫存器除以16,等於零,則程式計數 器内容傅送到R0M10,並且開始ROM時序計數器(圖13方塊 406 )。 起始在執行畫梯形副程式之前,用於梯形循環程式的 變數,其相關於超级瑪琍歐暫存器,如所示在梯形程式列 表的起始部份,例如,v rx 〃是*耋圖X位置〃相關於暫 存器R1,以及變數w rloop"相颶於暫存器R13。 經濟部中央櫺準局员工消费合作社印製T In the selection of the size of this paper, the standard of β-stricken home sample (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 g *) 92 .7. 20,000 sheets (Η) 21.4538 Λ 6 Π 6 Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Μ 工 消 # Cooperation Du Yin Refer to 3) 602 for the description of the invention. The registers 600 and 602 are erased in response to a command, such as the reset control flag described above. In addition, multiplexers 604 and 606 receive input from different registers in register block 76. Multiplexers 604, 606 receive input from the lower bits of the command bus to implement the lower 4 bits of the command and define the destination or source register of the command. In addition, the predetermined lower bit from the super NES address bus is incorporated into multiplexers 604 and 606 to provide super HES access to this register group. The multiplexers 6 0 4 and 6 06 select the register feed Z and Y bus. Circle 17 shows the register block 76, and the additional register selection control logic implemented in the register control logic 78 in FIG. 4B. Set the FR0MX register 618, use a decoded FR0MSET signal generated by the FROM instruction. After receiving the FRO MSET signal, the contents of the Y bus are loaded into the register 618. The data loaded in the register 618 becomes the data used for the execution of the post-winding instruction. The contents of the temporary register 618 are used for one of the synthesis rounds to the multiplexer 622. The multiplexer 622 also receives the contents of the R0 register (which uses a preset register) as one of its inputs. The other input of the multiplexer 622 is the input of the multiplexer 620. The multiplexer 620 receives the content input of the program counter (that is, the register R15), and then inputs it from the register used to execute the MERGE instruction, and the register R1 (for example, used to execute this drawing instruction). The multiplexer 620 selects one of the inputs and generates the state of the XSEL2 and XSEL3 bits based on using the look-ahead transition 551 as shown in Fig. 15A. Multiplexer 622—increasing the input and meshing the contents of the Y bus to place the same data on the X bus, such as on the Y bus. As previously mentioned, the paper size is used in the beta national standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297; ¢) 9 3 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (II) (please read the precautions before writing this page ) 214588 λ 6 __Η6 V. Invention description? 4) As mentioned, the input to the multiplexer 622S is tilted, like the output of the FROM X register 618 described above. The output of the multiplexer 622 is selected, based on the state of the generated XSEL0 and XSEL1 bits, and is coupled to the X bus. In the above description, the special purpose functions of many temporary registers ~ R15 will not be repeated here. The output of the register ~ R3 is broadcast to the multiplexer 608, the output of the register R4 ~ R7 is combined to the multiplexer 610, the output of the registers R8, R11 is combined to the multiplexer 612, temporary storage The output networks of the devices R12 ~ R15 are connected to the multiplexer 614. To one of the multiplexers 608, 610, 612, and 614, one of the different inputs, using YSEL1 and YSEL0 bit selection, as shown by _16 from the multiplexer 606 output. The output from the multiplexers 608, 610, 612 and 614 is input to the multiplexer 616 in sequence. The selection to one of the multiplexers 616-4 is based on the state output from the YSEL2 and YSEL3 bits of the multiplexer 606 as shown in FIG. The output of the multiplexer 616 is coupled to the buffer register 617, and its output is sequentially coupled to the Y bus. Printed by the 3rd Industrial and Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Reference registers R0 to R15 are input. Each register has an enable input. It is selected using the ZSEL bits 0 to 3 generated as shown in FIG. Each bow register also has an I clock signal input CK and a data input Data-in. After proper buffering, data is received from the Z bus. The temporary storage 124 is used for various multiplication operations. It also includes the rounding of disabling low and disabling high bits, and the input of disabling low and enabling high bits. Temporary register R15, program counter PC, receive a value signal CCHCD from the fast loader 400 of the ROM controller in U13, prohibit a slap skip operation until the current 16-byte fast segment is loaded into the fast RAM . In addition, the program counter receives an indefinite signal from the command decoder, which is 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (II) (please read the precautions to be filled out by Sun to fill in this page first). This paper »簋 度 遑 用 中 《B 家The standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210x297 g; 94 Λ 6 η 6 V. Invention description gas 5) LOOPEN, the command should generate a jump operation and enable the PC to load the contents of the register R13. In addition, the register R15 receives a power-on reset signal RESET, and when a loop command is executed, a PN input causes the program counter to load the contents of the register R13. As described above, the graphics co-processor of the present invention is combined with the main TV player system to facilitate the use of different special effects, including, for example, the rotation, enlargement, and / or reduction of polygon-based objects. The example of Fig. 18 is a flow chart of the Maliou chip program, which is used to draw a slap trapezoid, describing how to program the Maliou chip to produce a part of the polygonal base sample that is displayed. The Ma Jingou program that generates this polygonal target will be explained in detail together with how Ma Li hardware executes this program as follows. Referring first to the high level of the flowchart shown in FIG. 18, initially, some of the registers in register blocks R1 to R15 are related to variables that generate trapezoids. (That is, the register R1 stores the pixel X position, the register R2 stores the pixel Y position line, and the register R7 stores the trapezoidal height, etc.). Thereafter, as indicated by block 650, a loop counter is set and the starting pixel value is calculated. Printed by the Zhengong Consumer Cooperative of the Bureau of Standards and Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the back-end notes #fill this page), as indicated by box 652, do a value check to determine the height of one of the trapezoidal horizontal lines. If the result of subtracting the end point of the line from the starting point of the line is a negative value (-VE), the routine jumps to block 660. If the line start point minus the line end point is a positive inclination value, and the length of the line indicates that the length of the line does not exceed, then the loop counter (654) is decremented, and a one-turn circle pixel instruction is executed to obtain an appropriate pixel picture. As shown in block 6 58, a value check is performed to determine whether the content of the loop counter is zero. If the Xunchen counter is not zero, then execute a value skipping paper »Standard Universal Use BH home« Bi (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297; it) 9 5 81. 7. 20,000i | t (II) ^- -V. Description of Invention A6) Return to block 654 to decrease the cycle counter (654) and draw another pixel (656). If the Xunchen counter is equal to zero, the X-shaped sample of the left polygonal side and the X-shaped polygon of the right polygonal side are updated (660). Later, the Y height of the trapezoidal trapezoid (662) will be eliminated. And if the result is not zero, it will jump back to block 650 (664) and execute the routine, and increase the Y coordinate, and move to the next scan line (665). If the height is equal to zero, this routine will be fully executed and this trapezoid (666) will be completed. To illustrate the use of the Maruio chip command to generate thumbnails for drawing a trapezoidal example program, an embodiment like the flowchart of FIG. 18 will be described below. : Draw trapezoidal loop r X = 1; draw X position rx = 2; draw Y position rxl = 3; top left X position rxlinc = 4; top left X position increases rx2 = 5; top right X position increases Central Bureau of Economic Affairs Printed by the employee consumer cooperative (please read the back-to-back notes #fill this page) r X 2 inc = 6; increase rdy = 7 at the top right x position; trapezoidal y height r 1 en = 12; Xunchen count, hline height γΙοορ = 13; Xunchen logo hi ines iwt rloop, hline2; set the start of h 1 ine cycle hi ine 1 paper Λ scale, use the "Guo" standard (CNS) Ή specification (2 丨 0X297 public; it) 96 81 7. 20,000¾ (I!) Λ 6 Η 6 Printed by the Beigongxiao F Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of Invention) nfr ο β r χ 1 Luot ο r χ η hib fro »xr 2 ihib in tor 1 en hire subrx ίο bmih 1 ines 3 η η oprlncr 1 en hi ines 2 m 1 ο op «plot hi ines 3 pass withrx 1 aiadd rxlinc awithrx 2 baddrx 2 incadexrdy; x = (rxl) > > 8» bne hlinesl mine ry; length, rlen = (rx2 > > 8)-(rxl > >8); result r 1 e n < 0 then jump h 1 ine; often draw a prostrate pixel: draw h 1 ine; rxl + = rxl inc; rx2 + = rx2inc; rdy-= 1; repeat rdy times; and complete the next attempt to prove that Maluou is hard How to execute the one-incline program in the body operation, the following describes the program generated by the above trapezoid. Before executing the trapezoidal generation program, the main computer's "Paper" application "National« Standard (CNS) A 4 specifications (210X297 public address) 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (II) (please read the precautions before reading (Fill in this page) -Installed-97 / 5¾¾ Π 6 _ Δ ^ _____---------- V. Description of invention times 8) (Please read the notes on the contrary to write this page by Sun Cheng) , Super HES, write directly to the code group register, and enter the screen picture base register, as explained above in the flow chart of Figure 5. In addition, the Super NES writes the XEQ address of the lower byte to a healthy local register of the ROM controller 104 to decode from the Super NES address bus HA. Then the Super NES writes the high-order group to the ROM controller 104, combines the contents of the local register, and integrates it to the Z bus. After that, enable the register R15 which is used as the Maliou chip program counter. After detecting the above-mentioned super HES write operation to the back edge of the ROM controller 104, the Mario w G0〃 flag is set. If the program counter decrements the fast base register, which is greater than the size of the fast memory, or if the fast flag is double the program counter, subtract the fast base register divided by 16, equal to zero, the program counter content is sent to R0M10 And the ROM timing counter is started (block 406 in FIG. 13). The variable used for the trapezoidal cycle program before executing the trapezoidal subprogram, which is related to the super mario register, as shown at the beginning of the ladder program list, for example, v rx 〃 是 * 耋The position of Figure X is related to the register R1, and the variable w rloop " phase is relative to the register R13. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Development of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

在指定這些暫存器後,如下執行梯形程式。當在ROM 控制器104之ROM時序計數器406,到逹5的計數(大約200 撤徹秒/時,將執行第一個指令w IWT rloop, hline, 2〃 ,從ROM資料匯流排門閂進入圖4A所示平行管道暫存器62 。同時,資料寫入快速RAM94。在執行指令IWT rloop, h 1 i n e s 〃時,增加程式計數器。w I C "和w I Μ "旗標設定 ,以標明在指令流的後鑛二舾位元組是立即資料。當ROM 本紙張尺度遑用中《 B家搮準(CNS)甲4規格(210x297公;¢) 98 81. 7. 20,000^(11) Λ 6 B6 經濟部屮央橾準局CS:工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明9乡) 時序計數器406到逹5 ,立即資料(低位元組)寫到快速 RAH94中,並且保持在ROM控制器104之暫存器。重覆ROM抓 取機構,並且立即資料的高位元組組合於低位元組,並沿 路進到Z匯流排。致能暫存器R13,在以儲存Z匯流排的 内容,欲設定循琛計數器。從該常式的此黏,自記憶體抓 取每個指令,直到遇到循環指令。 在執行FROM RX1指令時,指令碼的最低4位元,載入 到暫存器控制器(參考圖16)的4位元a FROM Y 〃暫存器。 此外,致能從RX1(暫存器R3)資料進入到Y匯流排,並且 餘存在此16位元* FROM X"暫存器618。在執行* TO RX" 指令時,指令碼的最低4位元,載入到暫存器控制器(參 考圖16)的4位元"致能Z"暫存器600。 執行'' HIB"指示,利用設置· FROM X"暫存器的16 位元内容,進入X匯流排。ALU放置X匯流排的最高位元 組,進入Z匯流排的低位組,並且設定Z匯流排的最高位 元組於零。此移動部份的X位置,並且留下開始點,用於 在暫存器(暫存器R1)之第一水平線。 在執行'' FROM RX2"指令時,像類似於上述執行a FROM RX1〃指令之操作。"HIB"指令所引起之操作,(類 似於上述者),其相對於梯形的最上右X座樣,留下第一 水平線末端在暫存器R0(此預設暫存器之操作如叠積器)。 執行w RLEN"指令與'' SUB RX"指令時,因此線的開 始減掉的末端RLEN(R12)=Ro-Rx。假如有一傾負結果,則 設定正負號旗標,指示出有一傾錯誤條件。 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項典填寫本I) 裝· 訂· 線· 本紙張尺度遑用中BiTiMS準(〇Νδ)Ή規格(210X297公ft) 〇 〇 8丨.7. 20,000張(II) Λ 6 Η 6 經濟部屮央標準局負工消费合作社印製 五、發明説·》Ιι〇<Ρ ) '' BMI HLLNES3"指令是一偁2位元組指令,假如正 負號旗樺設定,則其中第一位元組設定一艏旗標。假如條 件旗標設定,則第二位元組為跳躍偏移。(其中R15等於 R15加上此指令)。假如不是,R15仍然未改變,並且曲缠 正常程式執行。 執行INC RLEN"指令,線長度暫存器加1,以確保 至少畫一値像素。LOOP"指令操作使得R12 = R12-1計算 。假如R12不是零,則R15(程式計數器)載入R13的内容, 因此有一値跳躍。 假如在此點程式於快速RAM94範圍内,刖快速載人電 路400將檢測到此跳躍,並且將如它做的暫停執行繼绩載 入快速RAM94。當它芫成,程式計數器載入新值,並且從 快速RAM94抓取下一個指令。 欲執行,PLOT"指令,該循環/畫圖指令將形成一値 水平線晝圖演算法。a PLOT 〃指令將利用Rl, R2(當成X 和Y座樣)設定銀幕畫面像素位址,到如圖4A所示、、色彩 暫存器"54之色彩設定。利用耋圖硬體52計算包含像素之 字元位址。新像素資料保持在字元線缓衝區(色彩矩陣), 直到瑪琍歐晶片移入畫在不同字元位置。當所有色彩資訊 拷貝到色彩矩陣内雙缓衝區機清的第二層時,則資訊寫到 外部RAM。 執行WITH RX1"與* ADD RX1 LNC"指令,僳更新 梯形的左邊X座檫。類似地,w WITH RX2"與、、ADD RX2 INC 〃像操作更新梯形的右邊。、' DEC RDY〃, w BEN, 本紙張尺度遑用中B國家«準(CNS)>P4規格(210X297公;ft) 1 〇 〇 81. 7. 20,000¾ (I!) (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再塡寫本頁) Λ 6 Π 6 214588 五、發明説明ι(〇 1)After specifying these registers, execute the ladder program as follows. When the ROM timing counter 406 of the ROM controller 104 reaches the count of 5 (approximately 200 withdrawal seconds / hour, the first instruction w IWT rloop, hline, 2〃 will be executed, and the ROM data bus latch will enter Figure 4A The parallel pipeline register 62 is shown. At the same time, the data is written to the fast RAM 94. When the instruction IWT rloop, h 1 ines 〃 is executed, the program counter is increased. The w IC " and w I Μ " flag settings are set to indicate The second byte of the back stream of the instruction stream is an immediate data. When the paper size of the ROM is used, the "B Family Standard (CNS) A 4 specification (210x297 g; ¢) 98 81. 7. 20,000 ^ (11) Λ 6 B6 Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Biography CS: Printed by the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of Invention 9 Township) Timing counter 406 to 5 5, immediate data (low byte) is written to the fast RAH94, and kept in the ROM controller 104 Temporary register. The ROM capture mechanism is repeated, and the high-order byte of the immediate data is combined with the low-order byte, and goes along the way to the Z bus. The enable register R13 is used to store the contents of the Z bus, and the counter to be set is to be set. From this sticky of the routine, each instruction is fetched from the memory until a loop instruction is encountered. When the FROM RX1 instruction is executed, the lowest 4 bits of the instruction code are loaded into the 4-bit a FROM Y 〃 register of the scratchpad controller (refer to Figure 16). In addition, the data from RX1 (register R3) is enabled to enter Y bus, and the 16-bit * FROM X " register 618 remains. When executing the * TO RX " instruction, the lowest 4 bits of the instruction code are loaded into the 4-bit " Enable Z " register 600 of the scratchpad controller (refer to FIG. 16). Execute the "HIB" instruction and use the 16-bit content of the setting FROM FROM X "to enter the X bus. ALU places the highest byte of the X bus, enters the lower byte of the Z bus, and sets the highest byte of the Z bus to zero. The X position of this moving part, and leaving the starting point, is used for the first horizontal line in the register (register R1). When executing the '' FROM RX2 " instruction, it is similar to the above operation of executing a FROM RX1〃 instruction. The operation caused by the " HIB " instruction, (similar to the above), relative to the uppermost right X block of the trapezoid, leaving the end of the first horizontal line in the register R0 (this preset register operates like a stack Integrator). When executing the w RLEN " instruction and the ‘SUB RX " instruction, the end of the line that is subtracted from the beginning RLEN (R12) = Ro-Rx. If there is a negative result, set a plus or minus flag to indicate a negative error condition. (Please read the precautionary notes and fill in this I first) Binding · Binding · Thread · The size of the paper used in the BiTiMS standard (〇Νδ) Ή specifications (210X297 ft) 〇〇8 丨 .7. 20,000 sheets (II ) Λ 6 Η 6 Printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the National Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Statement》 Ιι〇 < Ρ) '' BMI HLLNES3 " instruction is a 2-byte instruction, if the sign is set , Then the first byte sets a bow flag. If the condition flag is set, the second byte is the skip offset. (Where R15 is equal to R15 plus this instruction). If not, R15 remains unchanged and the normal program is executed. Execute the INC RLEN " instruction and increase the line length register by 1 to ensure that at least one pixel is drawn. The LOOP " instruction operation makes R12 = R12-1 calculation. If R12 is not zero, R15 (program counter) is loaded with the contents of R13, so there is a value jump. If the program is within the range of the fast RAM 94 at this point, the fast manned circuit 400 will detect the jump, and load the execution succession as it did into the fast RAM 94. When it is finished, the program counter is loaded with the new value, and the next instruction is fetched from the fast RAM 94. To execute, the PLOT instruction, the loop / drawing instruction will form a horizontal level day chart algorithm. a PLOT 〃 command will use Rl, R2 (as X and Y blocks) to set the screen pixel address to the color setting of the color register " 54 as shown in FIG. 4A. The map hardware 52 is used to calculate the character address including pixels. The new pixel data remains in the character line buffer (color matrix) until the Maliop chip moves into the drawing at different character positions. When all the color information is copied to the second layer of the double buffer machine in the color matrix, the information is written to the external RAM. Execute the WITH RX1 " and * ADD RX1 LNC " instructions to update the left X-frame of the trapezoid. Similarly, w WITH RX2 " AND, ADD RX2 INC 〃 image operation updates the right side of the trapezoid. , 'DEC RDY〃, w BEN, the paper size is used in the B country «quasi (CNS)> P4 specifications (210X297 public; ft) 1 〇〇81. 7. 20,000¾ (I!) (Please read the back And the matters needing attention will be written on this page) Λ 6 Π 6 214588 V. Description of Invention ι (〇1)

Hlinesl ,與 INC RY"指令操作移入下一値γ位置(下 一齒掃描線),直到完成梯形。 下列程式列表,示範如何程式瑪琍歐晶片旋轉陣列的 8位元X, Υ和Ζ點。此常式像根據本發明實施例程式繪 圖共處理器,如下是本常式之列表。 從轉列表: ;旋轉一個8位元X, Υ, Ζ點的陣列 ;利用暫存器之一個旋轉矩陣 ;r«atl21 1 , rmat2 1 1 3, rmat 2 3 22 , rmat 3 2 3 1 , rnat0033 ;矩陣元素倦8位元有正負號分數 ;例如 1 2 7 = 1 2 7/ 1 28 =大約 1 ; -128=-128/128=-1 ;彼等緊密地儲存,當成每個暫存器之28位元元素 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印製 r ζ r t rnatl211 raat2113 rnat2322 rmat3231 rmat0033 routyptr 10 ;temp ;矩陣元素1 1和1 2 ;矩陣元素1 3和2 1 ;矩陣元素22和23 :矩陣元素31和32 ;矩陣元素33 ;Pt「到旋轉點緩衝區 本紙》尺度遑用中B «家楳準(CNS) T4規格(210x297公*) 10 1 81. 7. 20,000張(II) 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 五、發明説明1 ) fflsh**roti>oints8 b i w t rl4,pointsaddr ffl i w t rl2,nun points » i w t routptr.m-rotpn n c a c h e ove r 1 3 , p c imatrotploop in t o r x id g e t b mine r14 a f r o a rnatl211 to r t is a u 1 t r x m t o r y n g e t b nine r 1 4 m t r o m riaat2113 n h i bHlinesl, and INC RY " instruction move to the next value γ position (next tooth scanning line) until the trapezoid is completed. The following program list demonstrates how to program the 8-bit X, Υ, and Z points of the Martial Array Rotating Array. This routine is like a program drawing co-processor according to an embodiment of the present invention. The following is a list of the routines. From the turn list :; rotate an 8-bit array of X, Υ, and Z points; use a rotation matrix of the register; r «atl21 1, rmat2 1 1 3, rmat 2 3 22, rmat 3 2 3 1, rnat0033 ; Matrix elements are 8-bit with positive and negative signs; for example, 1 2 7 = 1 2 7/1 28 = approximately 1; -128 = -128 / 128 = -1; they are closely stored as each register 28-bit elements (please read the back and notes # fill in this page) printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs r ζ rt rnatl211 raat2113 rnat2322 rmat3231 rmat0033 routyptr 10; temp; matrix elements 1 1 and 1 2 ; Matrix elements 1 3 and 2 1; Matrix elements 22 and 23: Matrix elements 31 and 32; Matrix elements 33; Pt "The paper to the buffer of the rotation point" scale is used in B «Household Standard (CNS) T4 specification (210x297 Public *) 10 1 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (II) 214588 Λ 6 Β 6 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention Instructions 1) fflsh ** roti > oints8 biwt rl4, pointsaddr ffl iwt rl2, nun points »iwt routptr.m-rotpn ncache ove r 1 3, pc imatrotploop in torx id getb mine r14 afroa rna tl211 to r t is a u 1 t r x m t o r y n g e t b nine r 1 4 m t r o m riaat 2113 n h i b

;ROM ptr到將被轉旋點 ;將被旋轉點的數目 ts; RAM Ptr到旋轉點緩衝匾 ;設定快速記億體位址 ;起始循環位址 ;取得X ;11 ;η 1 1 $ X ;取得y (請先間讀背而之注意事項再填窍本頁) η n u 1 t r y to r t n a d d r t ;2 1 » π 2 1 -S y 本紙》尺度逡用中國国家«準(CNS)甲4規格(210X297公;¢) 102 81. 7. 20,000張(Η) A 6 Η 6 五、發明説明1(0 3) n t 〇 r ζ m g e t b nine r 1 4 iatr*〇Bi rai£it3231 m m u 1 t r z a a d d r t ;取得z ;31 ;a» 3 1 窣 z is a d d r o si h i b; ROM ptr to the point to be rotated; the number of points to be rotated ts; RAM Ptr to the rotation point buffer plaque; set the fast memory address; start cycle address; get X; 11; η 1 1 $ X; Obtain y (please read the precautions before filling in this page) η nu 1 try to rtnaddrt; 2 1 »π 2 1 -S y this paper" Standard "Chinese National Standards (CNS) A 4 specifications ( 210X297 male; ¢) 102 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (Η) A 6 Η 6 5. Description of the invention 1 (0 3) nt 〇r ζ mgetb nine r 1 4 iatr * 〇 Bi rai £ it3231 mmu 1 trzaaddrt; get z ; 31 ; a »3 1 窣 z is addro si hib

Bstb (routptr) ;儲存旋轉x (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) ffi i n e routpt b t r o iB rmatl211 ffl h i b b t o r t η n u 1 t r x ;12 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 mfrosa n is u 1 t r y n t o r t s a d d r t » t r o m raat3231 m h i b 本紙张尺度边用中《國家«準(CNS) f 4規格(210X297公*) ;22 « !B 2 2 ^ y 103 81. 7. 20,000張(Η) 214538 Λ 6 η 6 五、發明説明10 4) 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 m m u 1 t r z ; m 32^ z add r t a a d d r o a h i b n s t b (r o U t P t Γ ) » 儲存旋轉y nine r o u t P t Γ B t Γ 0 ffi r n a t21 13 9 13 屋t 0 r t η n u 1 t Γ X > a 1 3 v x 1 t Γ 0 ffi r n a t 2 322 t 23 n h i b η n u 1 t r y t a 2 3 * y m t o r t n a d d r t ffl f r o 釀 r团8 t 0 0 3 3 9 33 霣通u 1 t r z bi 3 3 ^ z n a d d r t is a d d r 0 a h i b (請先閲讀背而之注意事項#填寫本頁) 裝- 訂_ 線- 本紙》尺度遑用中β國家«準(CNS)TM規格(210X297公址) 104 81. 7. 20,000張(II) 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 五、發明説明1 ^5 ) 疆stb ( r o u t p t r ) ;儲存旋轉z nine routptr 當使用本發明之可程式繪圖共處理器,結合主電腦糸 统,例如超级NES,可産生如圖19, 20與21範例之某些持 別效應。如圖19所示,目標亦即直升機的側視圖被畫出。 此圖不精確地反射出使用瑪琍歐晶片所産生的高品質顯示 。圖20與21你前述圖19的放大與旋轉圖。使用本發明的繪 圖共處理器,産生3D型(和其它)待別效應,包括在高速旋 轉比例的變化多邊形基目標。而只有對主電視遊樂器處理 条統有最小的負擔。 本發明已詳細說明,本發明之詳細掲示只是說明與範 例之目的。當前述實施例做為最佳實施例,對熟悉該行業 之專業人士而言,仍可有許多變化與修改。如下申請專利 範圍將該等變化與修改,包含在本發明之精神與範園之内 (請先閲讀背而之注意事項再塡寫本頁) 裝· -_ 經濟部中央標準局员工消费合作社印製 本《張尺度边用中國《家楳準^胳)肀4規格(2丨0x297公;it) 105 81. 7. 20,000張(Π)Bstb (routptr); store rotation x (please read back to the precautions # fill out this page) ffi ine routpt btro iB rmatl211 ffl hibbtort η nu 1 trx; 12 printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau employee consumer cooperatives mfrosa n is u 1 tryntortsaddrt »trom raat3231 mhib This paper is used in the" National «Standard (CNS) f 4 specifications (210X297 public *); 22«! B 2 2 ^ y 103 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (Η) 214538 Λ 6 η 6 V. Description of the invention 10 4) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperatives mmu 1 trz; m 32 ^ z add rtaaddroahibnstb (ro U t P t Γ) »Storage rotation y nine rout P t Γ B t Γ 0 ffi rna t21 13 9 13 house t 0 rt η nu 1 t Γ X > a 1 3 vx 1 t Γ 0 ffi rnat 2 322 t 23 nhib η nu 1 tryta 2 3 * ymtortnaddrt ffl fro brewing group 8 t 0 0 3 3 9 33 霣 通 u 1 trz bi 3 3 ^ znaddrt is addr 0 ahib (please read the back-end precautions # fill out this page) 装-資 _ 線-本 纸》 會 遑China β country «quasi (CNS) TM specifications (210X297 public address) 104 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (II) 214588 Λ 6 Η 6 V. Description of invention 1 ^ 5) Xinjiang stb (routptr); storage rotation z nine routptr when Using the programmable graphics co-processor of the present invention, combined with the host computer system, such as the Super NES, can produce some unique effects as shown in the examples of FIGS. 19, 20, and 21. As shown in Figure 19, the side view of the target, the helicopter, is drawn. This image does not accurately reflect the high-quality display produced by the Malio wafer. Figures 20 and 21 are enlarged and rotated views of Figure 19 previously described. Using the drawing co-processor of the present invention produces 3D-type (and other) waiting effects, including changing polygon-based targets that rotate at high speeds. And there is only a minimum burden on the main TV game instrument processing system. The present invention has been described in detail, and the detailed description of the present invention is only for the purpose of illustration and example. When the aforementioned embodiment is the best embodiment, there are still many changes and modifications for professionals familiar with the industry. The following patent applications include these changes and modifications in the spirit and scope of the present invention (please read the precautions before writing this page). The textbook "Zhang Scale Uses China's" Family Standard "悀 4 Specifications (2 丨 0x297 g; it) 105 81. 7. 20,000 sheets (Π)

Claims (1)

214588 修-丨補充 H3 H/ 附 件 第 81 104859號 專 利 申 請 案 Φ 請 專 利 範 圍 修 正 本 (82年 6月 1 9日 ) 1 . 一 個 資 訊 處 理 系 統 (20 , 19 )之外部記、糸統( 19 ), 該 資 訊 處 理 % 统 包 括 一 個 顯 示 銀 幕 晝 面 (36 ) 9 並 具 有 一 涸 微 處 理 器 > 用 於 執 行 一 個 影 像 繪 ΓΒΠ 画 程 式 9 Μ 及 — 個 影 像 記 憶 體 (30) > 用 於 儲 存 表 示 多 個 字 元 的 字 元 資 料., 其 當 被 組 合 時 定 義 一 個 顯 示 圖 框 該 外 部 記 憶 髖 系 統( 19 )之特徵在於: 一 個 程 式 記 憶 體 (1 0) 9 用 於 儲 存 至 少 某 些 該 影 像 繪 圖 程 式 的 指 令 Η 及 一 個 轉 換 電 路 (2 ,52) t 其 耦 合 到 該 程 式 記 憶 體 ( 10 ), 用於接收Μ - -個像素規格表示的顯示資料, 處理 該 像 素 規 格 與 轉 換 該 像 素 規 格 資 枓 f 成 為 被 該 影 像 記 憶 體 (30 ) 所 使 用 的 字 元 資 料 形 式 0 2 . 如 Φ 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 统 9 所 述 之 該 像 素 規 格 9 包 括 座 標 資 料 定 義 在 顯 示 銀 幕 畫 面 (36 ) 上 像 素 的 位 置 9 與 該 轉 換 電 路 (2,52) $ 從 該 程 式 記 憶 體 接 收 該 像 素 規 格 0 3 . 如 請 專 利 範 圍 第 2 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 统 > 所 述 該 轉 換 電 路 (E 2) » 包 括 位 址 轉 換 電 路 (202 ,204 a , Fa ,2 14 , 216) f 用 於 接 收 像 素 座 標 資 料 t 並 於 產 生 —' 個 字 元 指 定 位 址 〇 4 . 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 铳 » 其 中 復 包 括 一 個 隨 機 存 取 記 憶 體 (RAM) (6 8 ), 與 媛 衝 記 憶 體 裝 置 ( 2 0 6 ), 其用1 β暫時儲存產生 自該轉換電路之字元資 甲 4(210X297U 韙) 1 2145B8 H3 料 1 以 及 用 於 耦 合 儲 存 在 該 緩 衝 記 憶 體 的字 元 資 料該 RAM ( 2 0 6 , 22 8 , 88 )之裝置3 5 . 如 甲 請 專 利 範 圍 第 2 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 % 统, 其 中 復包 括 記 錄 裝 置 9 俾 用 於 暫 時 儲 存 來 白 該 程 式記 憶 體 ( 2 0 2 , 2 0 4) 之 像 素 座 標 資 料 0 6 . 如 串 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統, 其 中 復包 括 — 個 可 程 式 繪 圖 處 理 器 (2 ), 耦合到該程式記憶體, 並 且 該 轉 換 電 路 (5 2 ) 在 該 繪 圖 處 理 器 實 施。 7 . 如 申 請 專 m 範 圍 第 6 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統, 所 述 之該 可 程 式 繪 圖 處 理 器 , 包 括 一 個 第 一 來 源 共同 匯 流 排(X) > 一 個 第 二 來 源 共 同 匯 流 排 (Y), 與- -個目的共同匯流 排 (Z), 該轉換電路從該第- -來源匯流排(X) 9 與 該第 二 來 源 匯 流 排 (Y )接收資料, 並且用於向前資料到該目 的 匯 流 排 (乙)。 8 . 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統, 所 述 該像 素 規 格 t 包 括 一 個 像 素 的 顯 示 座 標 , 與 相關 於 該 顯示 座 標 之 色 彩 資 訊 > 並 進 一 步 包 括 色 彩 暫 存器 裝 置 (54), 用 於 接 收 和 暫 時 儲 存 該 色 彩 資 訊 0 9 . 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 8 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 糸 統, 其 中 復包 拮 一 個 暫 存 器 矩 陣 (206 ), 用於從該色彩暫存器裝置接 收 像 素 色 彩 資 訊 0 • 10 •如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 糸 统, 其 中 復包 括 一 個 隨 機 存 取 記 憶 體 (R AM )( 6 , 8) > 與 一個 R A Μ控制器 (8 8 ) t 用 於 控 制 存 取 該 RAM, 與該轉換電路, 包括位址 轉 換 装 置 9 用 於 產 生 — 画 字 元 位 址 (2 02 ,204 ,Η A , FA , 甲4(210Χ 297父韙) 214588 H3 2 1 4 , 2 1 6) 與 字 元 資 料 產 生 裝 置 9 用 於 產 生字元 資 料 » 其 包 括 資 枓 係 相 對 於 該 像 素 規 格 (202 ,20 6 ) ,以及用於 傳 送 (206 ,2 16 ), 利用該轉換電路所產生的 字元位址與 字· 元 資 訊 9 到 該 RAM控制器( 88 )之裝置。 11 .如 串 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統, 其 中 復 包 括 一 個 隨 機 存 取 記 憶 體 (RAM) (6 , 8), 與 用於耦 合 字 元 資 訊 到 該 轉 換 電 路 之 裝 置 ,俾從相闞於該像 素規格之該 RAM, 利用該轉換電路(8 2 ,206 )處理該像素 規格。 12 .如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統, 其 中 復 包 括 儲 存 字 元 資 料 之 裝 置 P 其 中 該 轉 換 電 路( 52) 包 括 用 於 接 收 之 裝 置 9 從 該 用 於 儲 存 之 装 置 ♦ 被顯不 於 像 素 附 近 之 有 關 其 它 像 素 之 字 元 資 料 資 訊 0 前被處 理 中 0 13 .如 Φ 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 % 統, 所 述 之 程 式 記 憶 體 (1 0 ) 與 該 轉 換 電 路 (2 ,52) t 係 在電視 遊 樂 器 卡 匣 (1 9) 内 實 施 0 1 4 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 统, 所 述 之 該 轉 換 電 路 1 包 括 一 個 色 彩 矩 陣 ( 2 0 6 ), 用於 儲存資料, 此 資 料 相 關 於 指 定 像 素 與 在 此 字 元 的 其 它像素 t 其 中 包 括 此 指 定 像 素 〇 15 .如 請 專 利 範 圍 第 14項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統, 所 述 之 該 色 彩矩 陣 (206 )包括多數個行和列, 此色彩 矩陣利用列 載 入 並 且 利 用 行 讀 出 〇 16 .如 Φ 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 5 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統, 其 中 復 包 括 暫 存 器 裝 置 (202 ), 用於暫時儲存該像素 規格, 包括 像 素 座 標 資 料 » 與 定 址 該 色 彩 矩 陣 (206 ), 一部份則利 肀4(210X 297公寿) 3 214588 H3 用 至 少 部 份 該 暫 存 器 裝 置 的 內 容 0 - 17 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 % 統 » 其 中 復 包 括 位 元 未 定 装 置 t 用 於 記 錄 是 否 將 被 處 理 像 素 係 為 部 份 將 被 處 理 的 百 前 字 元 (2 10 )0 18 如 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 7 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統 > 其 中 復 包 括 隨 機 存 取 記 憶 装 置 (R AM) (6 , 8 ) 與 用 於 傳 送 利 用 該 轉 換 電 路 (52) 所 產 生 之 字 元 資 料 t 到 該 RAM之裝置, 其 係 依 該 位 元 未 定 裝 置 (2 10 )的狀態而定。 19 如 Φ 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 糸 統 > 其 中 復 包 括 指 示 不 需 要 更 新 (2 10 )的處理有關- -個像素規格之一 個 字 元 的 位 元 之 裝 置 〇 20 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 19項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 糸 統 t 所 述 之 該 轉 換 電 路 (52 ) » 包 括 產 生 一 個 字 元 位 址 之 装 置 » Μ 響 應 於 用 在 指 示 該 裝 置 的 一 個 預 先 決 定 狀 態 0 2 1 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 统 > 其 中 復 包 括 位 址 暫 存 器 裝 置 t 用 於 儲 存 利 用 該 轉 換 電 路 (2 16 )所 產 生 的 — 個 字 元 位 址 i 與 一 個 位 址 比 較 器 (2 18 ), 耦合 到 位 址 暫 存 器 裝 置 y 用 於 比 較 利 用 該 轉 換 電 路 所 產 生 的 巨 前 字 元 位 址 與 一 個 先 前 產 生 的 位 址 0 22 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 2 1 項 之 外 部 記 憶 體 系 統 1 其 中 復 包 括 字 元 記 憶 體 装 置 > 用 於 儲 存 字 元 資 料 (6 ,8 ), 與控制 装 置 ( 2 0 0 ), 響應於該位址比較器, 用於寫出儲存在該 位 址 暫 存 器 裝 置 之 位 址 t 到 該 字 元 記 憶 體 装 置 0 23 一 種 用 於 顯 示 銀 幕 晝 面 的 繪 圖 處 理 器 (2 ), 其中包括: 接 收 —* 個 像 素 規 格 (5 6 , 5 8 )的装置; 以及 甲 4(210X 297 公匁) 4 214588 _ ’ H3 一 涸 轉 換 電 路 (25) $ 用 於 處 理 該 像 素 規 格 t 並 且 產 生 一 個 字 元 規 格 指 定 包 括 指 定 像 素 之 一 個 字 元 0 24 如 Φ 請 專 利 範 圍 第 23項 之 繪 圖 處 理 器 1 所 述 之 該 像 素 規 格 , 包 括 一 涸 像 素 的 顯 示 座 標 9 與 相 關 於 該 顯 示 座 標 之 色 彩 資 訊 9 其 中 復 包 括 色 彩 暫 存 器 裝 置 9 用 於 接 收 與 暫 時 儲 存 該 色 彩 資 訊 0 25 . 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 23項 之 繪 圖 處 理 器 , 其 中 復 包 括 - 個 暫 存 器 矩 陣 ( 2 0 6 ), 用於從該色彩暫存器裝置( 54 ), 接 收 像 素 色 彩 資 訊 〇 26 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 23項 之 繪 圖 處 理 器 » 其 中 復 包 括 個 陲 櫬 存 取 記 憶 體 (R AM )( 6 , 8) 9 及 用 於 從 該 RAM耦合 字 元 資 訊 到 該 轉 換 電 路 之 裝 置 9 其 利 用 該 轉 換 電 路 ( 82 ,206)處理相關於該像素之規格。 27 一 種 用 於 一 個 資 訊 處 理 系 統 (20 , 19 )的繪圖處理器( 2), 此 系 統 具 有 一 個 主 處 理 單 元 (2 0) » 用 於 執 行 儲 存 在 至 少 — 個 記 憶 體 装 置 (1 0 )的 一 個 影 像 繪 圖 程 式 > 該 繪 圖 處 理 器 (2 )其特徵在於: 用 於 從 該 至 少 — 涸 記 億 體 (I HS TR ,6 2 , 6 0 )接收程式 指 令 之 裝 置 9 >λ 及 響 懕 於 至 少 一 個 預 先 決 定 程 式 指 令 之 裝 置 > 用 於 轉 換 相 闞 於 該 至 少 一 個 預 先 決 定 指 令 之 像 素 基 格 式 > 成 為 一 個 字 元 基 資 料 格 式 (52) 0 28 如 申 請 專 利 範 圍 第 2·7項 之 繪 圖 處 理 器 , 其 中 復 包 括 一 個 第 一 來 源 共 同 匯 流 排 (X), -個第二來源共同匯流 排 Π ), 與- -個目的共同匯流排< Z) Μ 及 於 轉 換 從 該 第 甲 4 (210X 297公尨) 5 H3 214588 一來源匯流排與該第二來源匯流排所接收資料,與向 前資枓到該目的匯流排之裝置。 _ 29.如申請專利範圍第27項之繪圖處理器,所述之該繪圖 處理器用於耦合到一個隨機存取記憶體(RAM)(6,8), 其中復包括一個R A Μ控制器(8 8 ),用於控制到該R A Μ之 存取,該用於轉換(52)之裝置,其包括位址轉換裝置 用於產生一個字元位址(202, 204, HA,FA,214,216),與 字元資料產生裝置,用於產生字元資料,包括相關於 該像素基資料(202,206), K及用於傳送(206,216)之 裝置,於利用轉換電路的該装置所產生字元位址與字 元資枓,到該R A Μ控制器(8 8 )。 6 甲4(210Χ 297公处)214588 Revision-丨 Supplement H3 H / Attachment No. 81 104859 Patent Application Φ Please revise the scope of the patent (June 19, 1982) 1. An external record and system of an information processing system (20, 19) (19 ), The information processing system includes a display screen daytime (36) 9 and has a micro-processor > used to execute an image drawing ΓΒΠ painting program 9 Μ and an image memory (30) > Stores character data representing multiple characters. It defines a display frame when combined. The external memory hip system (19) is characterized by: a program memory (10) 9 for storing at least some of the images The instruction Η of the drawing program and a conversion circuit (2, 52) t which are coupled to the program memory (10), are used to receive the display data represented by the pixel specification and process the pixel specification and Change the pixel specification resource f to be the character data format used by the image memory (30) 0 2. For example, Φ Please refer to the external memory system 9 of the patent scope item 1 The pixel specification 9 includes coordinate data Define the position 9 of the pixel on the display screen (36) and the conversion circuit (2,52) $ Receive the pixel specification 0 3 from the program memory. If the external memory system of the patent scope item 2 is requested Describe the conversion circuit (E 2) »Including the address conversion circuit (202, 204a, Fa, 21, 216) f for receiving pixel coordinate data t and generating-'character specified address 〇4. Such Patent application item 1 of the external memory system 鈳 »which includes a random access memory (RAM) (6 8), and Yuanyuanchong memory device (2 0 6), which is temporarily stored with 1 β generated from the Conversion of the word capital 4 (210X297U 韪) 1 2145B8 H3 material 1 and the device for coupling the character data stored in the buffer memory to the RAM (2 0 6, 22 8, 88) 3 5. External memory% system, including the recording device 9 for temporarily storing the pixel coordinate data 0 6 of the program memory (202,204). If the external memory of the patent scope item 1 is requested The system includes a programmable graphics processor (2), coupled to the program memory, and the conversion circuit (52) is implemented in the graphics processor. 7. If applying for an external memory system in item 6 of the special scope, the programmable graphics processor described includes a first source common bus (X) > a second source common bus (Y), Common bus (Z) with a destination, the conversion circuit receives data from the first source bus (X) 9 and the second source bus (Y), and is used to forward data to the destination bus Row (B). 8. As in the external memory system of claim 1, the pixel specification t includes the display coordinates of a pixel, and color information related to the display coordinates > and further includes a color register device (54) , Used to receive and temporarily store the color information 0 9. For example, the external memory system of the patent application item 8, which includes a register matrix (206) for receiving from the color register device Pixel color information 0 • 10 • For example, the external memory system of patent application item 1, which includes a random access memory (R AM) (6, 8) > and a RA Μ controller (8 8 ) t is used to control access to the RAM, and the conversion circuit, including the address conversion device 9 is used to generate-drawing character address (2 02,204, H A, FA, A 4 (210Χ 297 father) 214588 H3 2 1 4, 2 1 6) and character data generating device 9 Used to generate character data »It includes information about the pixel specification (202, 20 6) and transmission (206, 2 16), using the character address and word generated by the conversion circuit Meta information 9 to the device of the RAM controller (88). 11. An external memory system as claimed in item 1 of the patent scope, which includes a random access memory (RAM) (6, 8), and a device for coupling character information to the conversion circuit, from The RAM corresponding to the pixel specification uses the conversion circuit (82, 206) to process the pixel specification. 12. An external memory system as claimed in item 1 of the patent scope, which includes a device P for storing character data, wherein the conversion circuit (52) includes a device for receiving 9 from the device for storing The character data information about other pixels in the vicinity of the pixel is processed before 0 13. For example, please refer to the external memory% system of the first item of the patent scope, the program memory (1 0) and the conversion circuit ( 2, 52) t is implemented in the video game instrument cassette (1 9) 0 1 4 As the external memory system of the patent application item 1, the conversion circuit 1 includes a color matrix (2 0 6) , Used to store data, this data is related to the specified pixel and other pixels in this character t, including this specified pixel 〇15. If the external memory system of the patent scope item 14, the color The matrix (206) includes a plurality of rows and columns. The color matrix is loaded with columns and read out with rows. For example, Φ claims the external memory system of item 15 of the patent scope, which includes a register device (202 ), For temporarily storing the pixel specifications, including pixel coordinate data »and addressing the color matrix (206), part of it is 4 (210X 297 public life) 3 214588 H3 uses at least part of the contents of the register device 0-17 For example, the external memory% system of the first patent application range »which includes a device with undetermined bits t used to record whether the pixel to be processed is part of the hundred first characters to be processed (2 10) 0 18 If the patent scope item 17 of the external memory system is requested > which includes a random access memory device (R AM) (6, 8) and character data generated by using the conversion circuit (52) t to the RAM device, which It depends on the status of the undetermined device (2 10) of this bit. 19 If Φ please request the external memory system in item 1 of the patent scope > which includes a device indicating the processing of the one character that is not required to update (2 10)-a pixel specification of a character bit device. 20 If a patent is applied for The conversion circuit (52) described in the external memory system of the scope item 19 »includes a device for generating a character address» M in response to a predetermined state used to indicate the device 0 2 1 If a patent is applied Item 1 of the scope of the external memory system> which includes an address register device t for storing a character address i generated by the conversion circuit (2 16) and an address comparator (2 18), coupled to the address register device y for comparing the address of the giant pre-character generated by the conversion circuit with a previously generated address 0 22 such as the external memory of patent application item 21 System 1 which includes a character memory device> for storing character data (6, 8), and a control device (200), in response to the address comparator, for writing out the address stored in the address The address t of the register device to the character memory device 0 23 A graphics processor (2) for displaying the day surface of the screen, including: a device that receives-* pixel specifications (5 6, 5 8) ; And A 4 (210X 297 male creeper) 4 214588 _ 'H3 Yi-converting circuit (25) $ for processing the pixel specification t and generating a character specification specifying a character including the specified pixel 0 24 such as Φ please patent The pixel specification described in the graphics processor 1 of the scope item 23 includes a display coordinate 9 of a pixel and color information 9 related to the display coordinate. A color register device 9 is also included for receiving and temporarily storing the Color Information 0 25. Rushen The graphics processor of patent item 23, which includes a register matrix (206) for receiving pixel color information from the color register device (54). Item's graphics processor »which includes a long access memory (R AM) (6, 8) 9 and a device 9 for coupling character information from the RAM to the conversion circuit 9 which utilizes the conversion circuit (82 , 206) Process the specifications related to the pixel. 27 A graphics processor (2) for an information processing system (20, 19), this system has a main processing unit (2 0) »for executing one stored in at least one memory device (1 0) Image drawing program > The drawing processor (2) is characterized by: a device 9 > λ and ringtones for receiving program instructions from the at least-Yi Ji Yi (I HS TR, 6 2, 6 0) At least one device for pre-determined program commands > for converting the pixel-based format of the at least one pre-determined command > into a character-based data format (52) 0 28 as claimed in item 2 · 7 Graphics processor, which includes a first source common bus (X), a second source common bus (II), and a-destination common bus (Z) Μ and the conversion from the first 4 (210X 297 gong) 5 H3 214588 1 The data received by the source bus and the second source bus, and the device that forwards the data to the destination bus. _ 29. The graphics processor according to item 27 of the patent application scope, said graphics processor is used to be coupled to a random access memory (RAM) (6, 8), in which a RA Μ controller (8 8), for controlling access to the RA Μ, the device for conversion (52), which includes address conversion device for generating a character address (202, 204, HA, FA, 214, 216), And character data generating device for generating character data, including devices related to the pixel-based data (202,206), K, and transmitting (206,216), the character address and Character resource, to the RA M controller (8 8). 6 A 4 (210Χ 297 offices)
TW81104859A 1992-01-30 1992-06-20 TW214588B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US72820192A 1992-01-30 1992-01-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW214588B true TW214588B (en) 1993-10-11

Family

ID=51357181

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW81104859A TW214588B (en) 1992-01-30 1992-06-20

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW214588B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6646653B2 (en) 1992-01-30 2003-11-11 A/N Inc. Programmable graphics processor for use in a video game system or the like

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6646653B2 (en) 1992-01-30 2003-11-11 A/N Inc. Programmable graphics processor for use in a video game system or the like
US7229355B2 (en) 1992-01-30 2007-06-12 Nintendo Co., Ltd. External memory system having programmable graphics processor for use in a video game system of the like
US7432932B2 (en) 1992-01-30 2008-10-07 Nintendo Co., Ltd. External memory system having programmable graphics processor for use in a video game system or the like

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU657147B2 (en) External memory system having programmable graphics processor for use in a video game system or the like
KR100270198B1 (en) Programmable graphics processor having pixel to character conversion hardware for use in a video game system or the like
US5357604A (en) Graphics processor with enhanced memory control circuitry for use in a video game system or the like
TWI377520B (en) Extrapolation of nonresident mipmap data using resident mipmap data and computer-readable medium containing related instructions
US4967375A (en) Fast architecture for graphics processor
TW201203110A (en) Mapping between registers used by multiple instruction sets
CN102750664A (en) Register based queuing for texture requests
US9207919B2 (en) System, method, and computer program product for bulk synchronous binary program translation and optimization
TW201142740A (en) System and method for memory access of multi-thread execution units in a graphics processing apparatus
TWI281038B (en) Back-end image transformation
TW214588B (en)
US10212406B2 (en) Image generation of a three-dimensional scene using multiple focal lengths
US9852092B2 (en) System and method for memory access
WO2018057091A1 (en) Static data sharing mechanism for a heterogeneous processing environment
Nguyen Low-latency mixed reality headset
TWI225202B (en) Surface computer and computing method using the same
TW200945247A (en) Constant buffering for a computational core of a programmable graphics processing unit
TW384441B (en) Graphics processing method and apparatus thereof
CN108230229A (en) Image processing apparatus and image processing method
JP2009048509A (en) Multi-texture mapping device and memory storage method of multi-texture data
KR20010072505A (en) Data-processing arrangement comprising a plurality of processing and memory circuits
US20070279439A1 (en) Method and device for region-based bitblt with clipping-in or clipping-out
Stowell Three dimensional display processing-implementation of a real time system.
Davison Notes on a JOGL Active Rendering Framework
JPS6355673A (en) Control system for image processor